JP6901459B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values and can control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set set value.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work cannot be appropriately executed. ..

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing a setting confirmation operation.

(A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A setting confirmation control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process) that can control the setting value set by the setting means to a setting confirmation state that can be confirmed, and
An interrupt process execution means that executes an interrupt process that can execute a game-related process,
A special variable display means (for example, CPU 103) capable of variablely displaying special identification information (for example, a special symbol) and displaying the variable display result, and
A special variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring a special variable display period for variable display of special identification information, and
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, an ordinary symbol) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area and derives and displays the display result.
A normal variable time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring a normal variable display period for variable display of normal identification information, and
It is provided with an external output means capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall).
The setting confirmation control means can control the setting confirmation state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing is executed.
The interrupt process is executed when the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the special variable display period is clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the power to the gaming machine is controlled. The time counting of the special variable display period is interrupted from the restart of the supply to the end of the setting confirmation state, and the time measurement of the special variable display period is restarted when the setting confirmation state ends (for example, the CPU 103 has a CPU 103. The timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (Resume timekeeping),
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the power to the gaming machine is controlled. The time counting of the normal variable display period is interrupted from the restart of the supply to the end of the setting confirmation state, and the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted when the setting confirmation state ends (for example, the CPU 103 has a CPU 103. When the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, the clock of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and the time of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (Resume timekeeping),
The external output means can output the specific signal when it is controlled to the setting confirmation state (for example, a security signal is output when it is controlled to the setting confirmation state). According to this feature, the setting confirmation work can be suitably executed when the setting confirmation is desired to be performed immediately.
Further, the other gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the set value set by the setting means into a checkable setting confirmation state, and
A variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable means is changing to the first state.
The timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the period based on the fact that the variable means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable means is changing to the first state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. The timekeeping of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. , Resumes the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. A part that executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb019 in the movable body motion process.).

(B) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change process) capable of setting a setting value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the set value set by the setting means into a checkable setting confirmation state, and
A variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable means is changing to the first state.
The timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the period based on the fact that the variable means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable means is changing to the first state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. The timekeeping of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. , Resumes the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). The part where the CPU 120 executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb020 in the movable body operation process.).

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
An operation end detecting means (for example, a second rotation origin position) capable of detecting that the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401) has completed the predetermined operation (the initial position is detected when the rotating signal is OFF). Detection switch 408) and
Timekeeping means that can time (for example, upper limit timer)
With
The control means
After the movable body starts its operation, when it is detected by the operation end detecting means that the movable body has finished the predetermined operation (the initial position is detected when the rotating signal is OFF), the first It is determined that the end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) is satisfied.
When the movable body starts the operation, the time counting by the time measuring means (upper limit time timer) is started, and the movable body ends the operation, but the first end condition is not satisfied and the time measuring means (upper limit time timer) is not satisfied. ), When the time measured by the above reaches a predetermined time (upper limit time), it is determined that the second end condition (upper limit time elapses) is satisfied.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably perform control according to a predetermined operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
The control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) is the timing means (upper limit time timer) when the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) is satisfied. ) Is finished.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably perform control according to a predetermined operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
A movable body control means (for example, a motor control unit 409) that controls the operation of the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401) is provided.
The movable body control means
When the start condition (reception of the rotation start command) is satisfied, the control to start the operation of the movable body (rotation start control) is performed.
When the stop condition (reception of the rotation stop command) corresponding to the predetermined operation is satisfied, or when the specific time (stop time) elapses without satisfying the stop condition after starting the operation of the movable body. It is characterized in that it controls to stop the operation of the movable body.
According to this feature, since the operation of the movable body is stopped even when the end condition according to the predetermined operation is not satisfied, it is possible to prevent a problem caused by the inability to end the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 5.
The predetermined time (for example, the upper limit time) is longer than the specific time (for example, the stop time).
According to this feature, even when the operation of the movable body ends without satisfying the end condition according to the predetermined operation, the control of light emission can be ended after the operation of the movable body is completed, so that the player can end the light emission control. You don't have to feel uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The predetermined operation includes a plurality of types of operation patterns (for example, operation times of 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds) in which the operation times of the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401) are different.
The predetermined time (for example, the upper limit time) is a common time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the longest operation time (for example, 6 seconds) among the plurality of types of operation patterns.
According to this feature, it is not necessary to set a predetermined time according to each of a plurality of types of operation patterns, so that the control load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7.
The movable body (for example, the second movable body) can rotate.
Origin position detecting means (for example, second rotation origin position detecting switch 408) capable of detecting the origin position (initial position) of the movable body, and
A movable body control means (for example, a motor control unit 409) that controls the operation of the movable body (second movable body), and
With
The movable body control means detects the origin position after the stop condition is satisfied when the stop condition (reception of the rotation stop command) corresponding to the predetermined operation is satisfied after starting the rotation operation of the movable body. After the means detects the origin position (initial position), the control of rotating at the maximum speed is continued until the deceleration start position (braking start position) is reached, and the deceleration start position (braking start position) is directed toward the stop position. Perform deceleration control (see Fig. 8-33)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the stop condition is satisfied, the movable body can be stopped by a certain amount of rotation regardless of the position, so that the appearance of the stop operation of the movable body is improved.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means 9. Conventionally, in some gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428, a title is displayed to notify the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is desired to enhance the effect of the effect, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of the effect.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the means 9 of the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D) and 9-2 (F)). The part that displays the title of the reach production),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the supermarket. The part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach production of the super reach D from the start of the reach production of the reach D)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko game machine used in the feature part 023SG from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board. It is a figure which shows the structure of the image display device, the display state in the image display device, and the visual state of a stereoscopic image by both eyes of a player. In (A), the first movable body is located at the first origin position and the second movable body is located at the second origin position, and in (B), the second movable body is located at the second effect position. It is a front view which shows the state of being. In (A), the first movable body is located at the first intermediate position and the second movable body is located at the second origin position, and in (B), the first movable body is located at the first effect position. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the 2nd movable body is located at the 2nd origin position. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the structure of a production unit is seen from diagonally front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the structure of a production unit is seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a perspective view showing the upper part on the back side of the cover body when the first movable body is in the first origin position, and (B) is a perspective view showing a state in which (A) is viewed from the opposite direction. (A) is a perspective view showing the back side of the cover body when the first movable body is in the first intermediate position, and (B) is the back side of the cover body when the first movable body is in the first effect position. It is a perspective view which shows. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the structure of the first movable portion is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the structure of the first movable portion is viewed from diagonally behind. (A) is a rear view showing the first movable portion in the first intermediate corresponding position, and (B) is a rear view showing the first movable portion in the first effect corresponding position. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the first movable body is in the first origin position, and (B) is a schematic right side view. It is a rear view which shows the state which the 1st movable body is in the 1st origin position. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the first movable body is in the first intermediate position, and (B) is a schematic right side view. It is a rear view which shows the state which the 1st movable body is in the 1st intermediate position. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state in which the first movable body is in the first effect position, and (B) is a schematic right side view. It is a rear view which shows the state which the 1st movable body is in the 1st effect position. (A) is a state in which the first movable part has fallen from the position corresponding to the first origin and stopped at the first intermediate corresponding position, and (B) is a state in which the first movable part corresponds to the first intermediate according to the descent of the drive body. The state of falling from the position, (C) is a schematic view showing the state in which the first movable portion and the driving body are stopped at the position corresponding to the first effect. (A) is a state in which the first movable part falls from the position corresponding to the first origin and stops at the first intermediate corresponding position, and (B) is a state in which the first movable part corresponds to the first intermediate even if the driving body is lowered. It is a schematic view which shows the state which does not fall from a position, (C) is the state which the 1st movable part and the drive body are stopped at the 1st effect corresponding position. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the first movable body in the movable body production. It is a rear view which shows the state which the 1st movable body is located in the 1st effect position. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 8-22, (B) is a state in which the first movable body is raised to the first origin position, and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 8-22. .. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 8-22, (B) is a state in which the first movable body is raised to the first origin position, and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 8-22. .. 8-22 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE. (A) is a front view which shows the 1st rotation state of the 2nd movable body 401, and (B) is a front view which shows the 2nd rotation state. It is a rear view which shows the state which the base part of the 2nd movable body was removed. It is a block diagram related to the control of the 2nd effect device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. (A) is a diagram showing an operation time determination table, (B) is a diagram showing a light emission pattern determination table, and (C) is a diagram showing a sound pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd movable body motion processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control content of a motor control part. It is a timing chart which shows the stop state of the 2nd rotation motor. It is a timing chart which shows the operation state of each part with the execution of the operation notice. It is a timing chart which shows the operation state of each part with the execution of the operation notice. It is a timing chart which shows the operation state of each part with the execution of the operation notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the game information display part. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a special symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the shift mode of the 1st hold indicator and the 2nd hold indicator. It is a figure which shows the mode for each big hit type in a round display. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor when a setting value abnormality error occurs or when the power failure during the setting change is restored. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode when a setting value abnormality error occurs or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the special symbol display device when it recovers from the power failure during setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information stored in RAM and the state which is cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial design for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of activation of a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in the operation of the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the change of a set value and the confirmation end timing of a set value, and the number of executions of a 1st movable body initialization process and a 2nd movable body initialization process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value confirmation processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start processing in a feature part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop end processing in a feature part 10F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are displayed. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip-type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It is not necessary that there is a "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102, the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal, the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 023SG)
Next, the feature unit 023SG of the present embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "023SGS1", or "normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach". "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". Further, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 8-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1A, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the pachinko game machine 1A is viewed from the front side. The explanation will be given with reference to the direction. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

(Structure of pachinko game machine)
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1A used in the feature unit 023SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine used in the feature unit 023SG as viewed from the front. FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, the pachinko game machine 1A used in the feature unit 023SG of the present embodiment is placed between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 arranged on the back side of the game board 2. An effect unit 500 having a first effect device 300 and a second effect device 400 is provided. Further, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying not only a two-dimensional (2D) image but also a three-dimensional (3D) image.

(Image display device 5)
Next, the image display device 5 used in the feature unit 023SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the image display device, the display state in the image display device, and the visual state of the stereoscopic image by both eyes of the player.

The image display device 5 in the present embodiment can display a 2D image and can also display a 3D image. Hereinafter, a configuration for displaying a stereoscopically viewable 3D image on the image display device 5 will be briefly described.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the image display device 5 includes an image liquid crystal panel 900 for displaying a 3D image which is a three-dimensional image (video) as a stereoscopic image, and the image liquid crystal panel 900 from behind the image liquid crystal panel 900. It has a backlight 901 that irradiates planar light toward the front side, and a liquid crystal panel 910 for a disparity barrier provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 900 at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel 900. , It is realized by an image display device consisting of a parallax barrier type naked-eye three-dimensional display liquid crystal display device. The image display device 5 performs variable display of the decorative symbol during the variable display period of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

The disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 910 is a shutter that prevents the player's left eye from viewing the image for the right eye displayed in a vertically long strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 900 and the player's right eye from viewing the image for the left eye. A parallax barrier for displaying a discriminant barrier image having a vertically striped black portion and a transparent portion that allows the player's right eye to visually recognize the image for the right eye and the player's left eye to visually recognize the image for the left eye. It is a liquid crystal panel with relatively high light transparency that enables an image display state and a transparent state in which all pixels are transparent parts without vertical striped black parts.

That is, the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 910 of the present embodiment is a parallax barrier including a parallax barrier for preventing the player's left eye from viewing the right eye image and the player's right eye from viewing the left eye image. A display and a full-transparency display that does not display the parallax barrier are possible.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the image display device 5 uses the liquid crystal display device as the image liquid crystal panel 900 will be described, but the device is not limited to this, and the device of the image liquid crystal panel 900 is a CRT (CRT). It may be composed of a display device of other image display forms such as a Cathode Ray Tube), a FED (Field Emission Display), a PDP (Plasma Display Panel), a dot matrix LED, and an organic or inorganic electroluminescence (EL) panel.

Further, the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 910 is fixedly provided on the back side of the game board 2 at a position in front of the player side that overlaps with the image liquid crystal panel 900.

The effect control CPU 120 is a CGROM (display control) that stores two-dimensional (2D) image data and a three-dimensional (3D) image data for displaying a three-dimensional image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image according to a received effect control command. A command for reading necessary data from the unit 123) is output to the VDP (display control unit 123).

In FIG. 8-3, the image liquid crystal panel 900 has a predetermined width in a vertical strip shape, which forms a stereoscopic image read from the image data ROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120 by the VDP. The image for the right eye (R) and the image for the left eye (L) are displayed alternately. In the present embodiment, the display width of the right-eye image (R) and the left-eye image (L) is made uniform, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these display widths are set to the central portion of the screen. And the end may be different.

When the viewpoint position of the player is, for example, at X0 and D0, which are the reference positions, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the image corresponding to X0 and D0 is displayed on the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 910. For the right eye, each left eye image (L) displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 900 is hidden by a black band portion (shutter; also referred to as a non-transmissive portion) and blocked, and each right eye image (L). By allowing R) to be visually recognized through the non-black band portion (blank; also referred to as a transparent portion), only the image (R) for the right eye is provided to the right eye, while the image liquid crystal panel 900 for the left eye. Each right eye image (R) displayed in is hidden and blocked by a black band portion (shutter; also referred to as a non-transparent portion), and each left eye image (L) is hidden by a non-black band portion (blank; By being visually recognized through the transmissive part), only the image (L) for the left eye is provided to the left eye, so that the player can use the naked eye without wearing deflecting glasses or the like. You can watch stereoscopic images.

In FIG. 8-3, in order to help understanding, the distance between the liquid crystal panel 910 for the disparity barrier and the eyes of the player is compared with the distance between the liquid crystal panel 900 for the image and the liquid crystal panel 910 for the disparity barrier. For convenience of illustration, the crossing position where the line segments indicating the line of sight of the right eye and the left eye intersect is moved to the front side or the rear side of the liquid crystal panel 910 for the disparity barrier because the length is shown to be significantly smaller than the actual length. However, the actual amount of movement of these crossing positions is very small.

In the present embodiment, stereoscopic vision is performed in which the depth is sensed by utilizing the binocular parallax in the line-of-sight direction of the image seen by the right eye and the left eye. When the player visually recognizes the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 with both eyes, the line-of-sight directions when the right eye and the left eye visually recognize an arbitrary part in the 3D image are different, and the difference in the line-of-sight directions ( Depth can be sensed by the amount of parallax). The position where the line-of-sight directions intersect is referred to as a congestion position, and the angle formed by the line-of-sight directions at this congestion position is referred to as a convergence angle. If the convergence angle is large, the player perceives the 3D image as being close to himself, and if the convergence angle is small, the player perceives the 3D image as being far from himself. There is.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 in the first movable body effect is projected toward the front side (the side approaching the player) of the image display surface of the image display device 5. Although the congestion position is set so that the 3D image can be seen, it is possible to set the congestion position A in which the apparent protrusion of the 3D image is small and the congestion position B in which the apparent protrusion of the effect image is large, which will be described later. The distance corresponding to the rear part of the first movable body 301, which is the distance corresponding to the front part of the first movable body 301, which is the distance corresponding to the part where the 3D image appears at the congestion distance A far from the player, and the game. It may be possible to realize a portion where a 3D image appears to be present at a congestion distance B close to the person. As a result, in the first movable body 301, the apparent protrusion degree of the 3D image differs between the rear portion near the display area and the front portion far from the display area, so that a more stereoscopic effect can be produced. Further, it may be possible to execute an effect in which a plurality of congestion positions are set in addition to the congestion positions A and B.

Further, in the present embodiment, the congestion position is set so that the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 appears to be projected toward the front side (the side approaching the player) of the image display surface of the image display device 5. Although it is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the congestion position is set so that the effect image can be seen arranged on the back side (the side far from the player) of the display surface of the image display device 5. You may set it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the character image Z1 (see FIG. 8-17 (A)) displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a state of being set to the congestion position B, and the congestion position B is the first movable. By controlling the body 301 so that it is within a predetermined range in the front-rear direction, the first movable body 301 at a close position and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 can be seen in an integrated manner. Therefore, it is possible to carry out a powerful production.

Further, when the first movable body 301 is located at a distant close position on the front side of the image display device 5, the display area of the image display device 5 is hidden by the first movable body 301 and the player can visually recognize it with both eyes. Along with the occurrence of areas that cannot be seen, there will be areas that the player can see with one eye but not with the other eye. When a 3D image is displayed in such an area that can be visually recognized only by one eye, not only the stereoscopic view of the 3D image cannot be performed, but also the 3D image may appear unclear and blurred. Therefore, the 3D image is not displayed (or replaced with a 2D image and displayed) in the display area near the periphery of the first movable body 301, which is an area that can be visually recognized only by one eye, and is slightly separated from the first movable body 301. The 3D image may be displayed only in the display area that is visible to the player with both eyes. In particular, when the 3D image is a moving image and the 3D image operates together with the first movable body 301, it is effective to display the 3D image only in the display area that the player can visually recognize with both eyes.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which a 3D image can be displayed in the movable body production by the first movable body 301 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body by the second movable body 401 is used. A 3D image may be displayed in the effect or other effect (for example, a notice effect or a big hit effect), or the decorative pattern may be displayed as a 3D image.

Further, in the present embodiment, a stereoscopic image is displayed by an image display device including a paralux barrier type naked-eye stereoscopic display liquid crystal display device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lenticular lens method is used. Or, an integral imaging type naked-eye stereoscopic display liquid crystal display device may be used to display a stereoscopic image. Further, the stereoscopic vision is not limited to the one for stereoscopic viewing with the naked eye, and the stereoscopic vision may be performed by wearing deflecting glasses or the like.

(Direction unit 500)
Next, the effect unit 500 used in the feature unit 023SG of the present embodiment will be described. 8-4 shows a state in which the first movable body is located at the first origin position and the second movable body is located at the second origin position in (A), and in (B), the second movable body is in the second position. It is a front view which shows the state which is located at the production position. 8-5 shows a state in which the first movable body is located at the first intermediate position and the second movable body is located at the second origin position in (A), and in (B), the first movable body is the first. It is a perspective view which shows the state which is located at the production position, and the 2nd movable body is located at the 2nd origin position.

As shown in FIGS. 8-4 and 8-5, the effect unit 500 has a downward substantially U-shaped base body 501 fixed to the back side of the game board 2 and a first base body 501 provided above the base body 501. It mainly has an effect device 300 and a second effect device 400 provided below the base body 501.

The first movable body 301 has a first origin position (see FIGS. 8-4 (A) and (B)) located above the front side of the image display device 5 and an image display device 5 below the first origin position. It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the first effect position (see FIG. 8-5 (B)) located in front of the display area of, and from the first origin position to the first effect position, or. It is said that it can be dropped (movable) by its own weight from the first origin position to the first intermediate position (see FIG. 8-5 (A)) between the first origin position and the first advance position.

The second movable body 401 has a second origin position (see FIG. 8-4 (A)) located on the lower left side of the image display device 5 and a display area of the image display device 5 above the second origin position. It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the second effect position (see Fig. 8-4 (B)) located in front of the above, and it is also possible to rotate around the rotation axis facing the front-back direction. There is.

(First production device 300)
Next, the details of the first effect device 300 will be described. FIG. 8-6 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the structure of the effect unit is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 8-7 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the structure of the effect unit is viewed from diagonally behind. 8-8 is a perspective view showing the upper part of the back side of the cover body when the first movable body is in the first origin position, and FIG. 8-8 is a perspective view showing the state of (A) viewed from the opposite direction. It is a figure. 8-9 is a perspective view showing the back side of the cover body when the first movable body is in the first intermediate position, and FIG. 8-9 is a perspective view when the first movable body is in the first effect position. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of a cover body. FIG. 8-10 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the structure of the first movable portion is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 8-11 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the structure of the first movable portion is viewed from diagonally behind. 8-12 is a rear view showing the first movable portion at the first intermediate corresponding position, and FIG. 8-12 is a rear view showing the first movable portion at the first effect corresponding position.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7, the first effect device 300 includes a movable first movable body 301 and a moving means 303L for moving the first movable body 301 upward. It has a 303R and cover bodies 304L and 304R that are attached to the front side of the left and right side sides of the base body 501 and support the moving means 303L and 303R so as to cover them from the front side. The second effect device 400 has a second movable body 401 that can be operated, and a moving means 402 for moving the second movable body 401 in the vertical direction.

The moving means 303L and 303R rotate the guide shafts 306L and 306R and the guide shafts 306L and 306R, which are extended in the vertical direction and whose upper and lower ends are rotatably supported with respect to the cover bodies 304L and 304R, around the axis. It is mainly composed of the first elevating motors 308L and 308R for the purpose and the drive bodies 310L and 310R described later. The first elevating motors 308L and 308R and the guide shafts 306L and 306R are connected via a gear member (not shown), and the guide shafts 306L and 306R are rotated around the axis by driving the first elevating motors 308L and 308R. It is designed to rotate to. Further, concave groove portions 321 are spirally formed on the peripheral surfaces of the guide shafts 306L and 306R.

The guide shafts 306L and 306R have arms 309L and 309R located at the left and right ends of the first movable body 301 and the first movable body 301 arranged below the arms 309L and 309R from the first effect position to the first origin position. The drive bodies 310L and 310R, which are moved to, are attached so as to be able to move up and down.

The arms 309L and 309R are formed with through holes 331L and 331R through which the guide shafts 306L and 306R can be inserted in the vertical direction. The upper end side of the guide shafts 306L and 306R is inserted into the through holes 331L and 331R of the arms 309L and 309R so that the arms 309L and 309R are located above the drive bodies 310L and 310R. Since the inner diameters of the through holes 331L and 331R are larger than the outer diameters of the guide shafts 306L and 306R (that is, the dimensional difference between the inner diameter and the outer diameter is sufficiently large), the arms 309L and 309R are used as the guide shafts 306L and 306R. On the other hand, it can move smoothly up and down. In other words, the surface contact between the inner peripheral surfaces of the through holes 331L and 331R of the arms 309L and 309R and the outer peripheral surfaces of the guide shafts 306L and 306R is suppressed, and the frictional force causes the arms 309L and 309R (that is, the first movable body 301) to come into contact with each other. The vertical movement is not hindered.

As shown in FIGS. 8-8 and 8-9, the lower wall 319A, the upper wall 319B, the back wall 319C, and the inner wall 319D open to the outside of each of the arms 309L and 309R to the rear and left and right outside. Recesses 319L and 319R are formed. The lower wall 319A and the upper wall 319B are arranged vertically so as to form a gap having a separation dimension L1 between the lower wall 319A and the upper wall 319B. Since the left and right moving means 303L and 303R are configured in substantially the same manner, only the left moving means 303L is shown in FIGS. 8-8 and 8-9, and the right moving means 303R is not shown.

Through holes 332L and 332R penetrating in the vertical direction are formed in the driving bodies 310L and 310R forming a substantially rectangular parallelepiped, and guide shafts 306L and 306R are inserted into the through holes 332L and 332R. The inner diameters of the through holes 332L and 332R are slightly larger than the outer diameters of the guide shafts 306L and 306R, and the inner peripheral surfaces of the through holes 332L and 332R are engaged with the groove 321. (Not shown) is projected.

Further, the left and right drive bodies 310L and 310R are integrated via the first movable body 301, and are arranged close to the back surface of the cover bodies 304L and 304R to provide the guide shafts 306L and 306R. It is guided in the vertical direction with the rotation around the center regulated.

Therefore, when the left and right guide shafts 306L and 306R rotate, the drive bodies 310L and 310R are restricted from rotating around the guide shafts 306L and 306R, and the engaging portion (not shown) is the guide shaft 306L, By being fitted in the groove portion 321 of the 306R, when the guide shafts 306L and 306R rotate in the first direction, the drive bodies 310L and 310R rise, and the guide shafts 306L and 306R are in the second direction opposite to the first direction. The drive bodies 310L and 310R are designed to descend when rotated to.

The upper portions of the drive bodies 310L and 310R are provided with first receiving portions 320A and 320B for receiving the falling first movable body 301. The first receiving portions 320A and 320B are formed of, for example, an elastic member such as a rubber material, and can absorb the drop impact of the first movable body 301.

Further, on the outer side of the drive bodies 310L and 310R, locking members 340L and 340R that can be engaged with and disengaged from the locking recesses 319L and 319R of the arms 309L and 309R are provided upward. The locking members 340L and 340R have an inwardly facing locking claw 340A at the upper end, and the lower end is rotatable about a rotating shaft 341 provided on the upper portion of the driving bodies 310L and 310R and facing the front-rear direction. It is supported. Further, in the locking members 340L and 340R, the locking claws 340A are constantly urged in the direction away from the driving bodies 310L and 310R by a coil spring (not shown) ringed on the rotating shaft 341.

Side walls 342L and 342R facing in the vertical direction are erected on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 304L and the right side of the back surface of the cover body 304R. Further, inclined walls 343L and 343R that incline downward inward are erected from the substantially central portion of the side walls 342L and 342R in the vertical direction, and side walls 342L and 342L are erected from the lower ends of the inclined walls 343L and 343R. Auxiliary side walls 344L and 344R substantially parallel to 342R are erected on the guide shafts 306L and 306R side of the side walls 342L and 342R.

Therefore, when the drive bodies 310L and 310R are located at an upper position corresponding to the first origin position of the first movable body 301, the locking members 340L and 340R are tilted by being urged by a coil spring (not shown). Since it comes into contact with the inner surfaces of the side walls 342L and 342R in a posture, it is in an unlocked state in which it is separated from the locking recesses 319L and 319R (see FIG. 8-16). Further, when the drive bodies 310L and 310R are located at intermediate positions corresponding to the first intermediate positions of the first movable body 301, the locking members 340L and 340R are tilted by being urged by a coil spring (not shown). Since it comes into contact with the inner surfaces of the inclined walls 343L and 343R in a posture, it is in an unlocked state in which it is separated from the locking recesses 319L and 319R (see FIG. 8-9 (A)). Further, when the drive bodies 310L and 310R are located at a lower position corresponding to the first effect position of the first movable body 301, the locking members 340L and 340R are assisted by being urged by a coil spring (not shown). Although it abuts on the inner surface of the side walls 344L and 344R, the auxiliary side walls 344L and 344R are closer to the driving bodies 310L and 310R than the side walls 342L and 342R, so that they are held in the standing posture without being tilted and the locking recesses 319L and 319R. It becomes a lockable state that can be locked to (see FIG. 8-9 (B)).

In this way, the locking members 340L and 340R are released from the tilted posture by switching the guide portion from the inclined wall 343L and 343R to the auxiliary side wall 344L and 344R by moving the driving bodies 310L and 310R downward. It changes from the state to the lockable state of the standing posture. On the other hand, as the drive bodies 310L and 310R move upward, the guide portion is switched from the auxiliary side walls 344L and 344R to the inclined walls 343L and 343R, so that the standing posture is changed from the lockable state to the tilted posture. Change.

Therefore, in order to drop the first movable body 301 downward from the first intermediate position, the driving bodies 310L and 310R are lowered from the intermediate position, so that the locking member is inserted into the locking recesses 319L and 319R of the first movable body 301. When the locking claws 340A of 340L and 340R enter and are in a lockable state and the first movable body 301 does not fall for some reason, the locking claws 340A are locked to the lower wall 319A of the locking recesses 319L and 319R. Therefore, it is possible to forcibly move the first movable body 301 downward. That is, the drive bodies 310L and 310R having the locking members 340L and 340R, the guide shafts 306L and 306R for driving the drive bodies 310L and 310R, the first elevating motors 308L and 308R, the inclined walls 343L and 343R and the auxiliary side wall 344L. , 344R constitute a movement assisting means for assisting the movement (falling) of the first movable body 301 from the first intermediate position.

As described above, the movement assisting means for assisting the movement of the first movable body 301 from the first intermediate position to the first effect position is, for example, driving the first movable body 301 from the first intermediate position to the first effect position. The first movable body 301 acts on the first movable body 301 at least at the timing when the first movable body 301 starts to move downward, instead of a drive source or a driving mechanism that can be moved by force. Assists in promptly starting the descending motion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8, in the vicinity of the inclined walls 343L and 343R on the back surface of the cover bodies 304L and 304R, the locking members 340L and 340R when the driving bodies 310L and 310R move to the vicinity of the intermediate position. Guide ribs 345L and 345R that can be contacted with the back surface of the above are projected. As a result, for example, even when the driving bodies 310L and 310R are rotated around the guide shafts 306L and 306R due to the impact of the first movable body 301 falling to the first intermediate position, the locking members 340L and 340R can be moved. It is held in a position where it can be locked in the locking recesses 319L and 319R.

Further, inside the upper part of the guide shafts 306L and 306R on the back surface of the cover bodies 304L and 304R, the guide ribs project so as to come into contact with the front surfaces of the arms 309L and 309R when the first movable body 301 is located at the first intermediate position. 346L and 346R are extended in the vertical direction. As a result, for example, when the first movable body 301 falls to the first intermediate position, the guide ribs 346L and 346R come into contact with the front surfaces of the arms 309L and 309R, so that the falling speed is slightly suppressed. The impact on the 310R can be mitigated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9, when the drive bodies 310L and 310R move to the lower position in the vicinity of the lower part of the guide shafts 306L and 306R on the back surface of the cover bodies 304L and 304R, the drive bodies 310L and 310R A second receiving portion 347 capable of receiving the lower portion is provided. The second receiving portion 347 is formed of, for example, an elastic member such as a rubber material, and can absorb the drop impact of the first movable body 301. Therefore, when the first movable body 301 is dropped, the drive body 310L, The engagement portion (not shown) provided inside the 310R and fitted to the groove portion 321 is prevented from being damaged.

First origin position detection switches 315L and 315R (see FIG. 8-2) for detecting arms 309L and 309R are provided at the upper positions of the cover bodies 304L and 304R, and drive bodies 310L and 310R are detected at the middle position. First intermediate position detection switches 314L and 314R (see FIG. 8-2) are provided, and first lower position detection switches 313L and 313R (see FIG. 8-2) for detecting the driving bodies 310L and 310R are provided at the lower position. Is provided.

On the upper part of the cover bodies 304L and 304R, first effect solenoids 318L and 318R for holding the first movable body 301 at the first origin position are provided. As shown in FIG. 8-8, the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R include a locking member 318A capable of advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction. When the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R are in the off state, the locking member 318A is in an advanced state in which the locking member 318A protrudes to the rear side due to the urging force of the compression spring (not shown). That is, when the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R are in the off state, the first movable body 301 can be locked to each locking member 318A at both ends thereof to hold the first movable body 301 at the first origin position. .. Further, when the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R are in the ON state, the locking member 318A is in a retracted state in which the locking member 318A retracts to the front side against the urging force of the compression spring (not shown). That is, when the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R are on, the locked state between the first movable body 301 and the locking member 318A is released (that is, the first movable body 301 is not held at the first origin position). The first movable body 301 at the first origin position can be dropped by its own weight (in the released state).

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the first movable body 301 is provided with respect to the first movable portion 351 and the base body 501 which are movably guided in the vertical direction by the left and right guide shafts 306L and 306R. It has a second movable portion 352 that is movably guided in the front-rear direction, and a third movable portion 353 that connects the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352.

The first movable portion 351 includes a plate-shaped base portion 361 formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and a plurality of movable members (four in the present embodiment) operably provided on the front side of the base portion 361. It is composed of 362A to 362D and a rotating member 363 provided between the base portion 361 and the movable members 362A to 362D, and has a first origin corresponding position and a first origin corresponding to the first origin position of the first movable body 301. It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the position corresponding to the first effect and the position corresponding to the first effect.

The base portion 361 is composed of a base member 361A made of a non-transparent member and a cover member 361B made of a transparent member covering the front side of the base member 361A, and a plurality of first effect LEDs 312A (FIG. 8). -2) is provided so that light can be irradiated forward. A hole 364 is formed at a substantially central position of the cover member 361B, and the rotating member 363 rotatably provided in the hole 364 is provided by a first rotation motor 311 provided on the back surface of the base member 361A. It is possible to rotate around a rotation axis (not shown) that faces the front-back direction.

In the base member 361A, elongated holes 365A to 365D that movably guide the movable members 362A to 362D are formed so as to extend radially from the substantially central position in the front view at the positions corresponding to the movable members 362A to 362D. Interlocking shafts 370A to 370D projecting from the back surfaces of the movable members 362A to 362D are inserted into the elongated holes 365A to 365D from the front side so as to project to the rear side. On the other hand, in the cover member 361B, elongated holes 366A to 366D are formed so as to radiate from a substantially central position in front view at positions corresponding to the movable members 362A to 362D, and the elongated holes 366A to 366D are each movable. A pair of left and right guide shafts 371A to 371D projecting from the back surface of the members 362A to 362D are inserted from the front side.

A pair of left and right guide shafts 367A to 367D are projected rearward on the left and right sides of the upper back surface and the left and right sides of the lower back surface of the base member 361A, respectively. Further, rotating shafts 368L and 368R are projected rearward from the lower left and right sides of the back surface of the base member 361A. Arms 309L and 309R are attached to the left and right sides of the back surface of the base member 361A so as to project laterally, and guide rollers 369L and 369R capable of contacting the second movable portion 352 are attached to the left and right sides of the upper side of the base member 361A. It is installed.

On the left and right sides of the back surface of the base member 361A, interlocking members 380L and 380R for moving the movable members 362A to 362D in accordance with the vertical movement of the first movable portion 351 (base portion 361) can be slidably moved in the left-right direction. It is provided.

The left interlocking member 380L has a long hole 381A facing in the left-right direction in which the guide shaft 367A of the base member 361A is inserted, a long hole 381B facing in the left-right direction in which the guide shaft 367B of the base member 361A is inserted, and a movable member 362A. A long hole 382A facing in the vertical direction into which the interlocking shaft 370A is inserted, a long hole 382B facing in the diagonal direction in which the interlocking shaft 370B of the movable member 362B is inserted, and an interlocking shaft 395L of the third movable portion 353 described later are inserted. It has an elongated hole 383L that is gently curved to the left and right in the vertical direction.

The interlocking member 380R on the right side has a long hole 381C facing in the left-right direction in which the guide shaft 367C of the base member 361A is inserted, a long hole 381D facing in the left-right direction in which the guide shaft 367D of the base member 361A is inserted, and a movable member 362C. A long hole 382C facing in the vertical direction into which the interlocking shaft 370C is inserted, a long hole 382D in which the interlocking shaft 370D of the movable member 362D is inserted, and an interlocking shaft 395R of the third movable portion 353 to be described later are inserted. It has an elongated hole 383R that is gently curved to the left and right in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 8-12, the left and right interlocking members 380L and 380R are in a first interlocking position (see FIG. 8-12 (A)) which is close to each other and a second interlocking position (see FIG. B) It is said that it can be slid to the left and right with (see). Specifically, by being pressed in the left-right direction by the interlocking shafts 395L and 395R of the third movable portion 353, the guide shafts 367A to 367D of the base members 361A inserted into the elongated holes 381A to 381D guide the movement in the left-right direction. At the same time, the interlocking shafts 370A to 370D of the movable members 362A to 362D inserted into the elongated holes 382A to 382D in response to the movement are pressed to the left and right, so that the guide shafts 371A to 371D of the movable members 362A to 362D are covered members. The movable members 362A to 362D slide and move with respect to the base portion 361 by being guided by the elongated holes 366A to 366D of the 361B.

The movable members 362A to 362D are composed of a transmissive member that can transmit the irradiation light from the first effect LED 312A built in the base portion 361 forward, and the movable members 362A to 362D are attached to the base portion 361. It is movable between a close position (see FIG. 8-16 (A)) and a separated position (see FIG. 8-18 (A)) in which the movable members 362A to 362D are radially separated. Further, the front surface of each movable member 362A to 362D is provided with a predetermined decoration, and in a united state in which the movable members 362A to 362D are located at close positions, one decorative portion is provided by the decoration of the movable members 362A to 362D. (For example, one letter or number) is formed. Then, the movable members 362A to 362D move to the separated positions and change to the separated state, so that the one decorative portion can be made to appear as disassembled.

Further, magnets 385A to 385H are provided on the back surface of each movable member 362A to 362D adjacent to other members, and when the movable members 362A to 362D move to close positions, they correspond to each other. The magnetic forces of the magnets 385A to 385H keep the movable members 362A to 362D in close proximity to each other. As a result, for example, due to the impact when the first movable portion 351 falls to the first intermediate corresponding position or the first effect corresponding position, the movable members 362A to 362D move from the close position and between the movable members 362A to 362D. It is suppressed that a gap is generated in the.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the second movable portion 352 includes a base member 375A made of a non-transparent member, a cover member 375B made of a transparent member covering the front surface side of the base member 375A, and the like. A plurality of first effect LEDs 312B (see FIG. 8-2) are provided inside so as to be able to irradiate light toward the front. The front surface of the cover member 375B is provided with a predetermined decoration.

Guide shafts 376L and 376R facing in the left-right direction are projected from the upper parts of the left and right sides of the base member 375A, and guide holes 377L and 377R extending in the front-rear direction are provided in the upper part of the base body 501 (FIG. 8-Fig. 8-). 6) is movably inserted. The guide holes 377L and 377R are slightly inclined upward toward the front (see FIG. 8-13 (B)). Further, connecting members 378L and 378R are extended downward from the lower side portion of the second movable portion 352, and connecting members 378L and 378R are connected to the third movable portion 353 at the lower end portions of the connecting members 378L and 378R. A connecting shaft 378A facing in the left-right direction is provided.

In the second movable portion 352 configured in this way, the guide shafts 376L and 376R are behind the guide holes 377L and 377R of the base body 501 at the first origin corresponding position corresponding to the first origin position of the first movable body 301. It is located on the side and has a backward leaning posture in which the front surface of the cover member 375B faces rearward and upward. Then, the guide shafts 376L and 376R rotate about the guide shafts 376L and 376R while being guided forward by the guide holes 377L and 377R in response to the downward movement of the first movable portion 351. At the first intermediate corresponding position corresponding to the first intermediate position, the guide shafts 376L and 376R are located on the front side of the guide holes 377L and 377R of the base body 501, and the front surface of the cover member 375B is in an upright posture facing forward.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, the third movable portion 353 has a three-dimensional shape formed on the upper side and the left and right side sides of the plate-shaped base portion 390A and the base portion 390A made of a transparent member. It has a decorative portion 390B of. Bearing portions 391L and 391R are formed on the front upper side portion of the base portion 390A, and the connecting shafts 378A of the left and right connecting members 378L and 378R of the second movable portion 352 can be rotated in these bearing portions 391L and 391R. It is bearing on the axis.

Connecting arms 394L and 394R for connecting to the first movable portion 351 are provided on the left and right sides of the lower side portion of the base portion 390A. The connecting arms 394L and 394R have a first arm portion 394A rotatably supported on the lower side portion of the base portion 390A centering on a rotation shaft 393 whose upper end faces in the front-rear direction, and a lower end portion of the first movable portion 351. It has a second arm portion 394B rotatably supported by the rotating shafts 368L and 368R, and the lower end of the first arm portion 394A and the upper end of the second arm portion 394B are interlocking shafts facing in the front-rear direction. It is rotatably connected via 395L and 395R. The interlocking shafts 395L and 395R project forward and are inserted into the elongated holes 383L and 383R of the interlocking members 380L and 380R. Further, in the second arm portion 394B, the interlocking shafts 395L and 395R are maintained on the lower end side of the elongated holes 383L and 383R by the coil springs 396 mounted on the rotating shafts 368L and 368R of the first movable portion 351. It is being urged downward.

The first movable body 301 configured in this way has a first movable portion 351 provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction, a second movable portion 352 movable in the front-rear direction and rotatable, and a first movable portion 352. It has a third movable portion 353 that connects the movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352, and the first movable portion 351 falls from the first origin corresponding position to the first intermediate corresponding position by its own weight. 2 The movable portion 352 rotates about the guide shafts 376L and 376R while being pulled forward to change from the backward tilted posture to the standing posture, and the third movable portion 353 and the first movable portion 351 are positioned corresponding to the first origin. It descends from to the first intermediate corresponding position.

Further, when the first movable portion 351 falls from the first intermediate corresponding position to the first effect corresponding position, the second movable portion 352 is pulled out to the first intermediate corresponding position, so that the first movable portion 351 Only move downward with respect to the second movable portion 352 and the third movable portion 353. Then, by this lowering operation, the movable members 362A to 362D are moved from the close position to the separate position by the interlocking members 380L and 380R, so that the first movable portion 351 is deformed from the combined state to the separated state.

(Operation mode of the first movable body 301)
Next, the operation mode of the first movable body 301 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-13 to 8-20. 8-13 are a schematic front view showing a state in which the first movable body is in the first origin position, and FIG. 8-13 is a schematic right side view. FIG. 8-14 is a rear view showing a state in which the first movable body is in the first origin position. 8-15 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the first movable body is in the first intermediate position, and FIG. 8-15 is a schematic right side view. FIG. 8-16 is a rear view showing a state in which the first movable body is in the first intermediate position. 8-17 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the first movable body is in the first effect position, and FIG. 8-17 is a schematic right side view. FIG. 8-18 is a rear view showing a state in which the first movable body is in the first effect position. 8-19 shows a state in which the first movable portion falls from the first origin corresponding position and stops at the first intermediate corresponding position, and in (B), the first movable portion lowers the drive body. Correspondingly, the state of falling from the first intermediate corresponding position, (C) is a schematic view showing the state where the first movable portion and the driving body are stopped at the first effect corresponding position. 8-20 shows a state in which the first movable portion falls from the first origin corresponding position and stops at the first intermediate corresponding position, and in (B), the first movable portion lowers the drive body. However, (C) is a schematic view showing a state in which the first movable portion and the driving body are stopped at the first effect corresponding position.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 raises the first movable body 301 by the drive bodies 310L and 310R and holds it at the first origin position, and then the guide shafts 306L and 306R by the first elevating motors 308L and 308R. Is rotated in the second direction to lower the drive bodies 310L and 310R to the intermediate position (the position indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure). That is, in the initial state, the first movable body 301 is maintained at the first origin position, and the drive bodies 310L and 310R are maintained at the intermediate positions. In the initial state, the drive bodies 310L and 310R are held in the upper position, and the drive bodies 310L and 310R are lowered and held in the intermediate position and the lower position before the fall timing of the first movable body 301 is reached. You may do it.

Further, in the movable body effect of dropping the first movable body 301, the first movable body 301 is dropped (moved) from the first origin position, received by the driving bodies 310L and 310R at the first intermediate position, and then driven. By moving the bodies 310L and 310R from the intermediate position to the lower position, the first movable body 301 is dropped (moved) from the first intermediate position to the first effect position.

In the following, in the movable body effect, a mode in which the first movable body 301 dropped from the first origin position is received at the first intermediate position and then dropped (moved) to the first effect position will be illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the movable body effect, the first movable body 301 dropped from the first origin position is directly dropped to the first effect position without being received at the first intermediate position ( It may be moved), or the first movable body 301 dropped from the first origin position may be received at the first intermediate position and then not dropped (moved) to the first effect position.

First, as shown in FIGS. 8-13 and 8-14, in the initial state in which the first movable body 301 is located at the first origin position, the first movable portion 351 is visible to the player. Since the arms 309L and 309R are locked by the locking member 318A, they are held at the positions corresponding to the first origin. The second movable portion 352 has the guide shafts 376L and 376R located on the rear side of the guide holes 377L and 377R, and the connecting shaft 378A located on the front upper side of the guide shafts 376L and 376R. It is in a backward leaning posture with overlapping on the back side. The third movable portion 353 is held in an upright posture in an overlapping state on the back surface side of the first movable portion 351. That is, since the second movable portion 352 and the third movable portion 353 overlap with the back side of the first movable portion 351, it is difficult for the player to see (not visible).

Further, the locking members 340L and 340R of the drive bodies 310L and 310R are in an inclined posture when the drive bodies 310L and 310R are located at intermediate positions and hit the inner surfaces of the inclined walls 343L and 343R of the cover bodies 304L and 304R. Since they are in contact with each other, they are in an unlocked state in which they are not locked in the locking recesses 319L and 319R of the arms 309L and 309R.

Next, based on the fact that the drop condition is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined drop timing is reached during the execution of the movable body effect), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first movable body 301 from the first origin position. 1 When dropping to the intermediate position, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 and 8-16, the drive bodies 310L and 310R are held in the intermediate position (receives the detection signal from the first intermediate position detection switch 309B). The locking member 318A is retracted with the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R turned on on the condition that the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R are turned on. As a result, the first movable body 301 falls from the first origin position to the first intermediate position.

Specifically, the lower half of the first movable portion 351 overlaps the display area of the image display device 5 at the first origin corresponding position, and after falling from the first origin corresponding position, the first movable body 310L, 310R 1 It stops at the first intermediate corresponding position by being received by the receiving portions 320A and 320B. Then, at the first intermediate corresponding position, the whole overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5.

When the first movable portion 351 falls from the position corresponding to the first origin, the second movable portion 352 rotates while being pulled forward from the position corresponding to the first origin via the third movable portion 353, and the first movable portion 351 At the first intermediate corresponding position on the first origin corresponding position side (upper side), the first movable portion 351 is held side by side in an upright posture. At this time, the second arm portion 394B of the connecting arms 394L and 394R connecting the first movable portion 351 and the third movable portion 353 directs the interlocking shafts 395L and 395R toward the lower ends of the elongated holes 383L and 383R by the coil spring 396. Since the second arm portion 394B does not rotate even if the first movable portion 351 falls, the third movable portion 353 is pulled down together with the first movable portion 351. That is, the urging force of the coil spring 396 has a magnitude required to pull down the third movable portion 353 and the second movable portion 352 in response to the lowering of the first movable portion 351.

Next, when the first movable body 301 is further dropped from the first intermediate position to the first effect position, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the guide shafts 306L, by the first elevating motors 308L and 308R, The 306R is rotated in the second direction to move the drive bodies 310L and 310R from the intermediate position to the lower position. Here, the operation mode of the locking members 340L and 340R as the drive bodies 310L and 310R are lowered will be described below. Since the left and right moving means 303L and 303R are similarly configured in FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20, in the following, only the left moving means 303L is shown, and the right moving means 303R is shown. The illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), when the drive bodies 310L and 310R are located at intermediate positions and the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R are turned on and the locking member 318A is retracted, the first effect is set. The 1 movable portion 351 falls from the first origin corresponding position and is received by the first receiving portions 320A and 320B of the drive bodies 310L and 310R at the first intermediate corresponding position, so that the movable portion 351 stops at the first intermediate corresponding position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the drive bodies 310L and 310R are moved from the intermediate position to the lower position by rotating the guide shafts 306L and 306R in the second direction by the first elevating motors 308L and 308R. When the movement is started, the first movable portion 351 falls from the first intermediate corresponding position by its own weight in response to the lowering of the drive bodies 310L and 310R. That is, it descends (moves downward) together with the drive bodies 310L and 310R while being received by the first receiving portions 320A and 320B of the drive bodies 310L and 310R.

When the drive bodies 310L and 310R descend from the intermediate position, the locking members 340L and 340R are guided by the inclined walls 343L and 343R to rotate around the rotation shaft 341 and come into contact with the auxiliary side walls 344L and 344R. The position changes to the standing posture, and the locking claw 340A enters the locking recesses 319L and 319R to be in a lockable state. At this time, since the locking claw 340A is located at a substantially central position between the lower wall 319A and the upper wall 319B of the locking recesses 319L and 319R, a predetermined gap L10 is provided between the lower wall 319A and the locking claw 340A. Occurs. That is, the lockable state is a state in which the locking claw 340A is not locked to the lower wall 319A but can be locked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (C), after the locking members 340L and 340R are changed to the lockable state, the locking members 340L and 340R are lowered while the driving bodies 310L and 310R are lowered to the lower position. The first movable portion 351 descends together with the drive bodies 310L and 310R while the drive body 310L and 310R are maintained in the lockable state, and the first movable portion 351 becomes the first as the drive bodies 310L and 310R stop at the lower position. 1 Stop at the position corresponding to the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (A), the first movable portion 351 is received by the first receiving portions 320A and 320B of the driving bodies 310L and 310R at the first intermediate corresponding position, so that the first intermediate portion is received. A case where the first movable body 301 does not fall at the intermediate position for some reason when the first movable portion 351 is lowered to the first effect corresponding position by its own weight from the state where the first movable portion 351 is stopped at the corresponding position will be described.

Specifically, when the first movable portion 351 falls from the first origin position by its own weight and is received by the first receiving portions 320A and 320B of the driving bodies 310L and 310R at the first intermediate position, the first movable portion 351 is received. It jumps up or vibrates due to an impact. Further, the inner diameter of the through holes 331L and 331R of the arms 309L and 309R is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the guide shafts 306L and 306R so that the first movable portion 351 can smoothly fall. That is, since a relatively large amount of play is provided between the guide shafts 306L and 306R and the through holes 331L and 331R, the first movable portion 351 guides when it jumps up or vibrates due to the received impact. It may tilt back and forth or left and right with respect to the shafts 306L and 306R. When tilted in this way, the upper and lower surfaces of the inner peripheral surfaces of the through holes 331L and 331R are pressed against the outer peripheral surfaces of the guide shafts 306L and 306R, and the inner peripheral surfaces of the through holes 331L and 331R and the outer peripheral surfaces of the guide shafts 306L and 306R Friction resistance is generated between the two, and the first movable portion 351 is caught on the guide shafts 306L and 306R, and there is a possibility that the first movable portion 351 cannot be dropped due to its own weight.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first movable portion 351 falls to the first intermediate corresponding position, the second movable portion 352 and the third movable portion 353 also move to the first intermediate corresponding position, but these second movable portions The 352 and the third movable portion 353 can move between the first origin corresponding position and the first intermediate corresponding position, and do not move further via the first intermediate corresponding position. Therefore, when the first movable portion 351 falls from the first intermediate corresponding position to the first effect corresponding position, the second movable portion 352 and the third movable portion 353 do not descend, and the connecting arms 394L and 394R rotate. As a result, the first movable portion 351 is allowed to fall (see FIG. 8-12). However, the connecting arms 394L and 394R are subjected to the urging force required to lower the second movable portion 352 and the third movable portion 353 together with the first movable portion 351 to the first intermediate corresponding position by the coil spring 396. Therefore, if the load of the first movable portion 351 and the urging force of the coil spring 396 are balanced, the first movable portion 351 may not be able to fall from the first intermediate corresponding position due to its own weight. Further, if the connecting arms 394L and 394R and the interlocking members 380L and 380R do not operate smoothly, the first movable portion 351 may not be able to fall from the first intermediate corresponding position due to its own weight.

As described above, when the first movable portion 351 is not dropped from the first intermediate corresponding position by its own weight for the reason described above, the drive bodies 310L and 310R are downward from the intermediate position as shown in FIG. 8-20 (B). Even if the movement toward the position is started, the first movable portion 351 remains stopped at the first intermediate corresponding position, so that the drive bodies 310L and 310R are separated downward from the first movable portion 351. However, when the drive bodies 310L and 310R are separated from the first movable portion 351 by a predetermined distance L11, the locking members 340L and 340R are guided by the inclined walls 343L and 343R to rotate around the rotation shaft 341. By moving and changing to an upright posture in contact with the auxiliary side walls 344L and 344R, the locking claw 340A enters at a position near the lower wall 319A in the locking recesses 319L and 319R and is in a lockable state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (C), when the drive bodies 310L and 310R are further lowered, the locking claw 340A is locked to the lower wall 319A and is in a locked state. , The first movable portion 351 is forcibly pulled down by the driving force of 310R. That is, the movement assisting means including the drive bodies 310L, 310R, the locking members 340L, 340R, and the auxiliary side walls 344L, 344R can assist the movement of the first movable portion 351 downward, as described above. For some reason, the drive bodies 310L and 310R can be suitably lowered even when they do not fall from the first intermediate corresponding position.

More specifically, the timing at which the locking members 340L and 340R are in the lockable state is the timing when the first movable portion 351 is received by the driving bodies 310L and 310R at the first intermediate corresponding position and the driving bodies 310L and 310R. Is not the timing immediately after starting the descent from the intermediate position, but the timing is set so that the drive bodies 310L and 310R are separated from the first movable portion 351 by a predetermined distance L11, so that the first movable portion 351 is the first without any problem. When the locking claw 340A can be dropped from the intermediate corresponding position by its own weight, the locking claw 340A is not locked to the lower wall 319A, so that the first movable portion 351 can be smoothly dropped by its own weight, while the first movable portion 351 can be dropped. Only when the portion 351 cannot fall from the first intermediate corresponding position due to its own weight for some reason, the locking claw 340A can be auxiliaryly locked to the lower wall 319A and forcibly lowered.

Therefore, since it is not necessary to lock the locking claw 340A to the lower wall 319A each time it is lowered, it is possible to suppress wear and deterioration of members such as the locking claw 340A and the lower wall 319A. Further, in order to improve the accuracy of the locking timing, the locking members 340L and 340R are set to the unlocked state and the lockable state by utilizing the lowering motion without driving the locking members 340L and 340R by the drive source. Can be changed to.

Returning to FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, when the first movable body 301 falls from the first intermediate position to the first effect position, the first movable portion with respect to the second movable portion 352 and the third movable portion 353. Since only the 351 is lowered, the first movable portion 351 is separated from the second movable portion 352 lower than when it is in the first intermediate corresponding position, so that the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352 The third movable portion 353 (specific effect portion) appears visibly from the player through the gap generated between them.

Further, at the timing when the third movable portion 353 appears, the effect control CPU 120 places the character image Z1 as a specific effect image in the portion corresponding to the base portion 390A of the third movable portion 353 in the display area of the image display device 5. Is displayed as a stereoscopically viewable 3D image, so that the player can see through the base portion 390A of the third movable portion 353 that appears between the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352 and obtain an image. It is possible to visually recognize the character image Z1 that is stereoscopically displayed in the display area of the display device 5. Further, the first movable portion 351 and the third movable portion 353 are emphasized except for the portion corresponding to the base portion 390A in the display area of the image display device 5 (such as around the first movable portion 351 and the third movable portion 353). The effect image Z4 to be displayed is displayed as a 2D image.

Further, when only the first movable portion 351 descends with respect to the second movable portion 352 and the third movable portion 353, the connecting arms 394L and 394R rotate, whereby the interlocking members 380L and 380R move from the first interlocking position to the first. By sliding to the two interlocking positions, the movable members 362A to 362D each move from the close position to the separated position with respect to the base portion 361, so that the first movable portion 351 changes (deforms) from the combined state to the separated state. At the same time, by moving the movable members 362A to 362D to the separated positions, the rotating member 363 rotated by the first rotating motor 311 appears in the center of the base portion 361.

Although not particularly shown, when the first movable body 301 is raised from the first effect position to the first origin position, the guide shafts 306L and 306R are rotated in the first direction by the first elevating motors 308L and 308R. The drive bodies 310L and 310R are raised from the lower position to the upper position. By raising the drive bodies 310L and 310R from the lower position to the intermediate position, only the first movable portion 351 rises from the first effect corresponding position to the first intermediate corresponding position, and each movable member 362A to the base portion 361. Each of the 362Ds moves from the separated position to the close position and returns to the united state.

Next, as the drive bodies 310L and 310R rise from the intermediate position to the upper position, the first movable portion 351 rises from the first intermediate corresponding position to the first origin corresponding position. At this time, as the first movable portion 351 rises, the third movable portion 353 also rises, and the guide rollers 369L and 369R of the third movable portion 353 come into contact with the lower part of the second movable portion 352 to move the second movable portion 352. The portion 352 is pushed up, and the guide shafts 376L and 376R move to the rear side of the guide holes 377L and 377R, so that the posture changes from the standing posture to the tilted posture.

Then, the arms 309L and 309R of the first movable portion 351 are locked by the locking member 318A, so that the first movable body 301 is held at the first origin position. After the first movable body 301 is detected by the first origin position detection switches 315L and 315R, the guide shafts 306L and 306R are rotated by the first elevating motors 308L and 308R to move the driving bodies 310L and 310R from the upper position to the middle. By lowering it to the position, it returns to the initial drive state.

(Movable body production by the first movable body 301)
Next, an example of the movable body effect by the first movable body 301 will be described with reference to FIG. 8-21. 8-21 are diagrams in which (A) to (F) show an example of the effect of the first movable body in the effect of the movable body.

In the following, in the variable display based on the jackpot super reach fluctuation pattern, a case where the movable body effect by the first movable body 301 is executed at a predetermined timing in the super reach effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the effect control CPU 120 arrives at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. As shown in 21 (B), after setting the variable display mode of the decorative pattern to a predetermined reach mode, the super reach effect is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), an image Z2 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z3 "close!" Are displayed at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect. Then, an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the stick controller 31A is performed.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the stick controller 31A within the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A, or when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the operation of the stick controller 31A, FIG. As shown in -21 (D), the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R are turned on, and the first movable body 301 is dropped from the first origin position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), after the first movable body 301 stops at the first intermediate position, the guide shafts 306L and 306R are rotated by the first elevating motors 308L and 308R to drive the driving body. By lowering the 310L and 310R from the intermediate position to the lower position, the movable members 362A to the base portion 361 respond to the first movable body 301 falling (moving) from the first intermediate position to the first effect position. Each of the 362Ds moves from the combined position to the separated position, the first movable portion 351 is transformed from the combined state to the separated state, and the third movable portion 353 appears between the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352. To do. Then, the character image Z1 is displayed as a stereoscopically viewable 3D image in the display area of the image display device 5 through the base portion 390A of the third movable portion 353 that has appeared.

Next, at the timing when a predetermined time elapses after the first movable body 301 moves to the first effect position, the guide shafts 306L and 306R are rotated in the first direction by the first elevating motors 308L and 308R to drive the driving body. By raising the 310L and 310R from the lower position to the upper position, the arms 309L and 309R of the first movable body 301 are locked by the locking member 318A and held at the first origin position. In addition, the symbols aligned in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed to notify that a big hit has been achieved.

(Wiring structure in the first effect device 300)
Next, the wiring structure in the first effect device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-22 to 8-25. FIG. 8-22 is a rear view showing a state in which the first movable body is located at the first effect position. 8-23 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 8-22, FIG. 8-23 shows a state in which the first movable body is raised to the first origin position, and FIG. −B sectional view. 8-24 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 8-22 in FIG. 8-24, a state in which the first movable body is raised to the first origin position in FIG. -D sectional view. 8-25 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 8-22.

As shown in FIG. 8-22, a relay board 510 for relaying the wiring connection between the effect control board 12 and the first effect device 300 is provided on the upper right side of the back surface of the base body 501. Although the wiring between the relay board 510 and the effect control board 12 is not shown, the relay board 510 and the first rotation motor 311 and the first effect LED 312A mounted on the first movable portion 351 are shown. As the wiring to be connected, a cable C1 (member shown by a net dot in FIG. 8-22), which is an electric cable for supplying electric power or a signal and is composed of a flexible flexible flat cable, is used. The flexible flat cable may be a flat cable in which a plurality of covered wires are arranged and fused, a single wire, a stranded wire, or a stranded paired wire.

As shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-25, the cable C connected to the relay board 510 includes a first wiring portion C1 extending downward from the relay board 510 along the back surface of the base body 501. The second wiring portion C2 that folds back from the lower end of the first wiring portion C1 toward the left side, the third wiring portion C3 that folds downward from the right end of the second wiring portion C2, and the third wiring portion C3 to the left side. It has a fourth wiring portion C4 that is folded back toward the fourth wiring portion C4, and a fifth wiring portion C5 that is folded back downward from the right end of the fourth wiring portion C4.

As shown in FIG. 8-25, one end of the first wiring portion C1 is connected to the relay board 510, the surplus is folded back, and then the cover members 520 and 521 attached to the base body 501 attach the first wiring portion C1 to the base body 501. It is wired vertically along the back. Further, the second wiring portion C2 is wired in the left-right direction along the back surface of the base body 501 by the cover member 521 attached to the base body 501.

As shown in FIG. 8-24, the third wiring portion C3 is extended downward from the base body 501 and then turned over toward the front side so as to form a substantially U-shape in the side view, and the third movable portion 353 is formed. It is inserted between the cover member 523 and the cover member 523. Further, the cover member 522 hangs downward from the base body 501, and the cover member 523 hangs downward from the third movable portion 353. Since the cover member 522 and the cover member 523 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction so as to sandwich the third wiring portion C3 hanging downward from the front-rear direction, the cover member 522 and the cover member 523 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction. 3 When the movable portion 353 rises (or descends), the third wiring portion C3 is accommodated between the cover member 522 and the cover member 523 so as not to bend and not to bulge significantly in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (C), since the cover member 522 and the cover member 523 are formed in a substantially U-shape in cross-sectional view, when the third movable portion 353 rises (or falls). In addition, the third wiring portion C3 is guided so as not to deviate to the left and right sides.

Further, the fourth wiring portion C4 is wired in the left-right direction along the back surface of the base body 501 by the cover member 524 attached to the base body 501.

As shown in FIG. 8-23, the fifth wiring portion C5 extends downward from the third movable portion 353, and then is turned over toward the front side so as to form a substantially U-shape in side view, and the first movable portion C5 is first movable. It is inserted into the connector CN provided on the back surface of the portion 351. Further, the cover member 525 hangs downward from the third movable portion 353, and the cover member 526 hangs downward from the back surface of the first movable portion 351. Since the cover member 525 and the cover member 526 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction so as to sandwich the fifth wiring portion C5 hanging downward from the front-rear direction, the cover member 525 and the cover member 526 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction. 1 When the movable portion 351 rises (or descends), the fifth wiring portion C5 is accommodated between the cover member 525 and the cover member 526 so as not to bend and not to bulge significantly in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-23 (C), since the cover member 525 and the cover member 526 are formed in a substantially U-shape in cross-sectional view, when the first movable portion 351 rises (or falls). In addition, the fifth wiring portion C5 is guided so as not to deviate to the left and right sides with respect to the cover member 525 and the cover member 526.

(Second production device 400)
Next, the second effect device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27. 8-26 is a front view showing the first rotation state of the second movable body 401 and (B) the second rotation state. FIG. 8-27 is a rear view showing a state in which the base portion of the second movable body is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, the moving means 402 is rotatably supported on the base body 501 via a rotating shaft (not shown) that faces in the front-rear direction. A base portion 411 (see FIG. 8-7) that rotatably supports the second movable body 401 is attached to the tip of the 402.

The second movable body 401 is arranged so as to surround the circular first rotating portion 421 rotatably provided in the central portion on the front surface side of the base portion 411 and the first rotating portion 421. It has an annular second rotating portion 422 provided separately so as to be rotatable, and decorative portions 423A to 423C provided so as to be swingable around a rotating shaft 424 facing in the front-rear direction on the first rotating portion 421. ..

The decorative portions 423A to 423C are in the first effect state in which the decorative portions 423A to 423C are close to each other as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), and each decorative portion 423A as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B). It is possible to change to a second effect state in which ~ 423C is separated and each tip protrudes larger than the outer edge of the second rotating portion 422.

Further, inside the first rotating portion 421, the second rotating portion 422, and the decorative portions 423A to 423C, a plurality of second effect LEDs 406 (see FIG. 8-2) are provided so as to be able to irradiate light toward the front. When the second effect LED 406 emits light, the front surfaces of the first rotating portion 421, the second rotating portion 422, and the decorative portions 423A to 423C emit light.

As shown in FIG. 8-27, the drive shaft 405A of the second rotation motor 405 fixed to the back surface of the base portion 411 projects to the front side of the base portion 411 and is driven by the tip of the drive shaft 405A. The gear 430 is fixed. A first gear 431 that meshes with the drive gear 430 is provided on the back surface of the first rotating portion 421, and a second gear 432 having a diameter larger than that of the first gear 431 is first on the front side of the first gear 431. It is provided integrally with the gear 431.

On the other hand, an annular third gear 433 is provided on the inner peripheral portion of the second rotating portion 422, and a second gear 432 and a second gear 432 are provided between the second gear 432 and the third gear 433 in the base portion 411. A plurality of idle gears 434A to 434C that mesh with the third gear 433 are rotatably provided.

Further, on the back surface of the first rotating portion 421, a tubular detection piece 440 having a C-shape in rear view and a notch 440A formed in a part of the peripheral wall is projected toward the back surface side, and is a base. The detection piece 440 can be detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408 provided in the unit 411.

When the rotation start condition of the second movable body 401 is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 rotates the first rotation unit 421 by the second rotation motor 405, so that the second rotation unit 422 interlocks with the first rotation. It rotates in the opposite direction to the portion 421. Further, when the rotation speed of the first rotation unit 421 reaches a predetermined rotation speed, the decoration units 423A to 423C change from the first state to the second state. Further, when the rotation stop condition is satisfied, the rotation is stopped based on the stop control described later.

In the stop control, the position where the detection piece 440 is not detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408 so that the decorative portions 423A to 423C are always in the first state when the rotation of the first rotation portion 421 is stopped. That is, the first rotation unit 421 is controlled to stop at the second rotation origin position where the notch 440A is located at the position corresponding to the second rotation origin position detection switch 408.

(Control of the second production device 400)
FIG. 8-28 is a block diagram related to the control of the second effect device 400 in the present embodiment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 12 is provided with a motor control unit 409 that controls the drive of the second rotation motor 405 for rotating the second movable body 401 of the second effect device 400. .. The second rotation motor 405 is composed of a stepping motor, and the motor control unit 409 can rotate or stop the second rotation motor 405 by outputting an excitation signal corresponding to a predetermined excitation pattern. ing.

The effect control CPU 120 outputs a rotation start command to the motor control unit 409, instructs the motor control unit 409 to start rotation of the second rotation motor 405, and outputs a rotation stop command. , Orders to stop the rotation of the second rotation motor 405. Further, the motor control unit 409 outputs a rotating signal to the effect control CPU 120 for a period from the start of the rotation control of the second rotation motor 405 to the completion of the stop control of the second rotation motor 405. Therefore, it is possible to specify whether or not the second rotation motor 405 is rotating on the effect control CPU 120 side.

Further, the second movable body 401 is provided with a detection piece 440 (see FIG. 8-27) for detecting the second rotation origin position (hereinafter, may be referred to as an initial position), and the second is provided. The origin signal is output to the motor control unit 409 when the notch 440A (see FIG. 8-27) provided in the detection piece 440 is detected by the rotation origin position detection switch 408. The 409 specifies the initial position of the second movable body 401 by the origin signal, and performs stop control based on the specified initial position. Further, the origin signal is input not only to the motor control unit 409 but also to the effect control CPU 120, and the initial position of the second movable body 401 can be specified on the effect control CPU 120 side as well. ..

Next, an example of the advance notice effect determination process performed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of S171 of FIG. 7 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIGS. 8-29.

In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variation display result and the variation pattern (Sa001). The variable display result can be specified by the variable display result specification command that specifies the variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies the fluctuation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the special figure game. In this embodiment, the target of the advance notice effect is super reach (big hit), normal reach (big hit), super reach (loss), normal reach (loss), so specifically, the variable display result is a big hit. Whether or not there is, may be specified by the fluctuation display result specification command, and whether or not the fluctuation pattern is super reach or normal reach may be specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern specified in Sa001 is super reach or normal reach (Sa002), and if the fluctuation pattern is neither super reach nor normal reach, the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is either super reach or normal reach, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the type of the advance notice effect when the advance notice effect is executed (Sa003). In the present embodiment, as the type of the notice effect, it is possible to determine a plurality of types including the operation notice for rotating the second movable body 401. As types other than the operation notice, for example, a step-up notice in which the notice image changes stepwise, a cut-in notice in which a predetermined character appears, a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area, and the like can be determined. is there.

In Sa003, when the execution of the advance notice effect is decided, the probability of determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect is set so that the possibility of becoming a big hit is higher than the case where the execution of the advance notice effect is not decided. The jackpot expectation is higher when the advance notice effect is executed than when the advance notice effect is not executed. Further, in Sa003, when a specific type (for example, operation notice) is decided, there is a probability that the type of the notice effect is decided so that the possibility of a big hit is higher than when another type is decided. It is set, and when a specific type of advance notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when another type of advance notice effect is executed.

In addition, the jackpot expectation (reliability) of each notice effect is the probability that each notice effect is executed and becomes a big hit, the probability that each notice effect is executed and becomes a big hit, and each notice effect is executed and is lost. It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probabilities. For example, the probability that each notice effect is executed and becomes a big hit is the probability that the big hit is decided: A, the probability that the fluctuation pattern (super reach, normal reach) that is the target of the notice effect is selected when the big hit is decided: B, Probability that each notice effect is decided at the time of big hit determination: If C, it is A × B × C, and the probability that each notice effect is executed and loses is the probability that loss is decided: a, loss When the probability that the fluctuation pattern (super reach, normal reach) to be the target of the advance notice effect is selected at the time of determination: b, and the probability that each advance notice effect is determined at the time of loss determination: c, it is a × b × c. The jackpot expectation of each notice production is A × B × C / A × B × C + a × b × c.

Returning to FIG. 8-29, in Sa004, it is determined in Sa003 whether or not any of the advance notice effects is decided to be executed. If none of the advance notice effects has been determined, that is, if "no advance notice effect" is determined, the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when any of the advance notice effects is determined, the process proceeds to Sa005 and the determined type of advance notice effect is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

Next, it is determined whether or not the execution of the operation notice is decided, that is, whether or not the type of the notice effect to be executed is the operation notice (Sa006). If the execution of the operation notice is not decided here, the notice effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the operation notice, the operation time of the second movable body 401 according to the operation notice, the light emission pattern of the second effect LED 406 provided on the second movable body 401, and the light emission pattern of the second effect LED 406 provided in the second movable body 401 are output during the operation notice. The sound pattern of the sound effect is determined (Sa007, Sa009, Sa011), the determined operation time, light emission pattern, and sound pattern are stored in predetermined areas of the RAM 122 (Sa008, Sa010, Sa012), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed. To do.

In Sa007, any operation time is determined from 6 seconds, 4 seconds, and 2 seconds using the operation time determination table shown in FIG. 8-30 (A). In the operation time determination table, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A), a long operation time is easily determined in the case of a big hit, and a short operation time is easily determined in the case of a loss. When is executed, it is suggested that the longer the operating time of the second movable body 401, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In Sa009, any one of pattern 1 (red emission), pattern 2 (green emission), pattern 3 (yellow emission), and pattern 4 (blue emission) is used using the emission pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-30 (B). The emission pattern is determined. In the light emission pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B), the light emission pattern is likely to be determined in the order of patterns 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the case of a big hit, and patterns 4, 3 and 2 in the case of loss. The light emission pattern is set so that the light emission pattern can be easily determined in the order of 1, and when the operation notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is highest when the light emission color of the second production LED 406 is red, and then It is suggested that the jackpot expectation is high in the order of green, yellow, and blue.

In Sa011, any sound pattern is determined from pattern A and pattern B using the sound pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-30 (C). In the sound pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (C), pattern B is likely to be determined in both the case of a big hit and the case of a loss, but the pattern A is more likely to be determined in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. It is set so that it is easy to determine, and when the operation notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the sound effect is output in pattern A than when the sound effect is output in pattern B. It is suggested that it is high.

Here, the jackpot expectation (reliability) when the operation notice is executed is the probability of becoming a jackpot for each operating time (light emitting pattern, sound pattern), and the jackpot for each operating time (light emitting pattern, sound pattern). It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of becoming a loss and the probability of losing each operation time (light emission pattern, sound pattern).

In this way, in the advance notice effect determination process, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of the advance notice effect are determined when the advance notice effect is executed, and when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect. Is a process for executing the advance notice effect by the advance notice effect process in the variable display effect process of S172 of FIG. 7.

Next, an example of the second movable body operation process in which the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of rotating the second movable body 401 in the notice effect process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIGS. 8-31. The second movable body operation process is a process performed when it is determined in the above-mentioned advance notice effect determination process that the operation advance is to be executed.

In the second movable body operation process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the operation period of the second movable body 401 is (Sb001), and if it is not the operation period of the second movable body 401, the second movable body operation process. To finish. Whether or not the operation period of the second movable body 401 is specified is determined by whether or not the second movable body operation flag indicating that the second movable body 401 is in the operating period is set in the RAM 122. Here, the operation period of the second movable body 401 is the operation after the execution of the operation notice is determined, and after the start of the variable display, the second movable body 401 reaches the specified position by the second elevating motor 404. This is the period until the notice ends.

If it is the operating period of the second movable body 401 in Sb001, it is determined whether or not the second movable body 401 is in operation (Sb002). Whether or not the second movable body 401 is in operation is specified by whether or not the operating flag indicating that the second movable body 401 is in operation is set in the RAM 122.

When the second movable body 401 is not operating in Sb002, a value corresponding to the operating time determined in the advance notice effect determination process is set in the operating time timer for timing the operating time of the second movable body 401 (Sb003). ), Further, a value corresponding to a predetermined upper limit time (10 seconds in the present embodiment) is set in the upper limit time timer for timing the upper limit time of the operation notice (Sb004).

Next, a rotation start command is output to the motor control unit 409 (Sb005). Along with this, the motor control unit 409 controls to rotate the second rotation motor 405, and the rotation of the second movable body 401 is started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 with the light emission pattern determined in the advance notice effect determination process (Sb006). The light emission pattern defines the control content for turning on and off the second effect LED 406 with the corresponding light emission color and lighting / extinguishing pattern over a predetermined period, and corresponds to the repeated light emission pattern until the light emission control is completed. Light emission control is performed. It should be noted that a light emission pattern in which a series of control contents for turning on and off the second effect LED 406 may be applied for the time when the notice effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts sound output control for outputting the sound effect according to the sound pattern determined in the advance notice effect determination process from the speakers 8L and 8R (Sb007). The sound pattern defines the control content for outputting the sound effect by the corresponding sound pattern from the speakers 8L and 8R over a predetermined period, and the sound output control by the repeated sound pattern is performed until the sound output control is completed. It has come to be heard. It should be noted that a sound pattern in which the control content for outputting a series of sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R over the time when the advance notice effect is executed may be applied.

Next, an operating flag indicating that the second movable body 401 is operating is set in the RAM 122 (Sb008), and the second movable body operation process ends.

When the second movable body 401 is not operating in Sb002, it is determined whether or not the second movable body 401 is waiting to be stopped (Sb009). Whether or not the second movable body 401 is waiting to be stopped is specified by whether or not the stop waiting flag indicating the stop waiting of the second movable body 401 is set in the RAM 122.

If the second movable body 401 is not waiting to be stopped in Sb009, the operation time timer and the upper limit time timer are each subtracted by 1 (Sb010, Sb011), and whether or not the operation time timer has timed out, that is, in the advance notice effect determination process. It is determined whether or not the determined operation time has elapsed (Sb012), and if the operation time timer is not timer-out, the second movable body operation process is terminated.

When the operation time timer is out of the timer in Sb012, a rotation stop command is output to the motor control unit 409 (Sb013). Along with this, the motor control unit 409 will start the control to stop the second rotation motor 405. As will be described later, even if the motor control unit 409 receives the rotation stop command, the second rotation motor 405 is not stopped immediately, but after that, the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and controlled for the second rotation. Stop the motor 405.

Next, the stop wait flag indicating the stop wait of the second movable body 401 is set in the RAM 122 (Sb014), and the second movable body operation process is completed.

If the second movable body 401 is not waiting to be stopped in Sb009, that is, if the second rotation motor 405 is not stopped after the rotation stop command is output to the motor control unit 409, the upper limit time timer is set to 1. Subtraction (Sb015) is performed to determine whether or not the rotating signal output from the motor control unit 409 is ON, that is, whether or not the motor control unit 409 is controlling the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 (Sb015). Sb016), if the rotating signal is ON, the second movable body operation process is terminated.

If the rotating signal is not ON in Sb016, it is determined whether or not the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected (Sb017). As will be described later, when the second rotation motor 405 is normally stopped by the motor control unit 409, the second movable body 401 is stopped at the position where the initial position is detected. Therefore, in Sb017, the second movable body 401 is stopped. It will be determined whether or not the 401 has stopped at the normal position.

When the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected in Sb017, the light emission control started in Sb006 is stopped (Sb019), the sound output control started in Sb007 is stopped (Sb020), and the sound output control is set in the RAM 122. The stop waiting flag, the operating flag, and the second movable body operation flag are cleared (Sb021, Sb022, Sb023), respectively, and the second movable body operation process is completed. Along with this, in the second movable body operation processing from the next time onward, since it is determined in Sb001 that the operation period of the second movable body 401 is not reached, the timing of the upper limit time timer ends.

If the initial position is not detected in Sb017, it is determined whether or not the upper limit time timer has timed out, that is, whether or not the upper limit time of the operation notice has elapsed (Sb018), and the upper limit time timer is the timer. If it is not out, the second movable body operation process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the upper limit time timer is out of timer in Sb018, the light emission control started in Sb006 is stopped even in a situation where the initial position is not detected, that is, even if the second movable body 401 is not normally stopped. (Sb019), the sound output control started in Sb007 is stopped (Sb020), the stop waiting flag, the operating flag, and the second movable body operation flag set in the RAM 122 are cleared (Sb021, Sb022, Sb023), respectively. The second movable body operation process is completed.

Next, the motor control unit 409 will be described. The motor control unit 409 has a control register whose setting contents change according to an external command or an internal situation, and controls according to the setting state of the control register. I do.

For example, when a rotation start command is received from the effect control CPU 120, the fact that the rotation start command is received is set in the control register, and when a rotation stop command is received from the effect control CPU 120, the fact that the rotation stop command is received is set in the control register. Will be done. Further, the fact that the second rotation motor 405 is rotating is set in the control register, and the fact that the second rotation motor 405 is stopped is set in the control register. Further, whether or not the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408 is set in the control register. Further, it has a timer function for measuring the time, and a predetermined time elapses after the start of the time measurement, and that fact is set in the control register.

Next, an example of the control content of the motor control unit 409 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIGS. 8-32.

The motor control unit 409 refers to the setting status of the control register and receives a rotation start command from the effect control CPU 120, a rotation stop command from the effect control CPU 120, or the second rotation motor 405. It is determined whether the rotation is in progress (Sc001, Sc006, Sc011).

When it is determined that the rotation start command is received in Sc001, the control register is referred to to determine whether or not the second rotation motor 405 is stopped (Sc002), and if it is stopped, it is determined. Rotation start control is performed (Sc003), the rotating signal output to the effect control CPU 120 is turned ON (Sc004), and the stop timer is started to be clocked (Sc005).

In the rotation start control of Sc002, an excitation signal is output in a predetermined acceleration pattern for acceleration, and after the output of the excitation signal in the excitation pattern for acceleration is completed, the excitation pattern is switched to a constant speed. Controls the output of the excitation signal. As a result, the second rotation motor 405 rotates at the maximum speed.

When it is determined that the rotation stop command is received in Sc006, the control register is referred to to determine whether or not the second rotation motor 405 is rotating (Sc007), and if it is rotating, it is determined. Normal stop control is performed to stop the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 so that the stop position of the second movable body 401 becomes the specified stop position (Sc008), and after the stop control of the second rotation motor 405 is completed. , The rotating signal output to the effect control CPU 120 is turned off (Sc009), and the timing of the stop timer is terminated (Sc010).

In the normal stop control of Sc008, as shown in FIGS. 8-33, after the rotation start command is received and the stop condition is satisfied, the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408. After that, the excitation signal with the constant speed excitation pattern is output until the braking start position is reached. Therefore, the second rotation motor 405 is maintained in a state of rotating at the maximum speed up to the braking start position. Then, when it reaches the braking start position, it switches to the deceleration excitation pattern and outputs an excitation signal to decelerate toward the stop position, and when it reaches the stop position, it switches to the stop excitation pattern and excites it. A signal is output to stop the second rotation motor 405. At this time, when the second rotation motor 405 normally stops at the stop position, the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408, that is, the second movable body 401 is at the initial position. It will stop.

If the second rotation motor 405 is rotating in Sc011, the stop time set to limit the long-term rotation of the second rotation motor 405 after performing the rotation start control in Sc003 (the present embodiment). Then, it is determined whether 8 seconds have passed (Sc012), and if the stop time has passed, forced stop control is performed to forcibly stop the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 (Sc013), and the second After the stop control of the rotation motor 405 is completed, the rotating signal output to the effect control CPU 120 is turned off (Sc009), and the timing of the stop timer is ended (Sc010).

In the forced stop control of Sc013, unlike the normal stop control, the excitation signal is immediately switched to the deceleration excitation pattern without waiting for the detection of the initial position of the second movable body 401 by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408. Is output to decelerate, and when the stop position is reached, the excitation pattern for stopping is switched to output an excitation signal, and the second rotation motor 405 is stopped. At this time, since the vehicle does not decelerate toward the specified stop position, the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408 when the second rotation motor 405 stops. The state, that is, the second movable body 401 may stop at the initial position, or the second movable body 401 may stop at a position other than the initial position.

Next, the operation status of each part accompanying the execution of the operation notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-34 to 8-36.

As shown in FIGS. 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a rotation start command to the motor control unit 409 and outputs a rotation start command to the motor control unit 409 when the operation period of the second movable body 401 is reached due to the execution of the operation notice. The light emission control of the second effect LED 406 is started with the light emission pattern determined in the advance notice effect determination process, and the sound output control of the sound effect by the sound pattern determined in the advance notice effect determination process is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the motor control unit 409 that has received the rotation start command performs rotation start control, starts the rotation of the second rotation motor 405, and outputs the ON of the rotating signal to the effect control CPU 120. As a result, the rotation of the second movable body 401 is started, and the lighting with the light emission pattern determined in the advance notice effect determination process is started, and the sound effect speakers 8L and 8R according to the sound pattern determined in the advance notice effect determination process are used. The output of will be started.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a rotation start command to the motor control unit 409 when the operation time (either 2 seconds, 4 seconds, or 6 seconds) determined in the advance notice effect determination process elapses, and stops. It will be in a waiting state. Upon receiving the rotation start command, the motor control unit 409 performs normal stop control to stop the second rotation motor 405. When the normal stop control is completed, the OFF of the rotating signal is output to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 that detects the OFF of the rotating signal identifies that the second movable body 401 has stopped at a normal position because the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408. The light emission control of the second effect LED 406 is terminated, and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R is terminated. As a result, at the timing when the second movable body 401 stops at the normal stop position, the lighting of the second effect LED 406 accompanying the operation notice ends, and the output of the sound effects accompanying the operation notice from the speakers 8L and 8R ends. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 8-35, even when the motor control unit 409 that has received the rotation stop command performs normal stop control and stops the second rotation motor 405, the second movable body 401 has some trouble. It may not stop at the normal stop position.

In this case, even if the effect control CPU 120 detects that the rotating signal is OFF, the initial position of the second movable body 401 is not detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408, and the second movable body 401 stops at a normal stop position. Is not specified, so that the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R are continued. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a rotation start command and the second effect. When the upper limit time (10 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the operation of the movable body 401 is started, the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 is terminated and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R is terminated. To do.

As a result, even if the second movable body 401 does not stop at the normal stop position and the initial position of the second movable body 401 is not detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408, the second effect LED 406 accompanying the operation notice The lighting of the sound effect is finished, and the output of the sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R accompanying the operation notice is finished.

Further, when the second movable body 401 does not stop at the normal stop position, the upper limit time for ending the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R is the longest operating time ( When 6 seconds) is determined, the operating time elapses after the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 starts, and the time is set longer than the time until the second rotation motor 405 stops by the normal stop control. Therefore, a common upper limit time is applied regardless of the determined operating time.

As shown in FIG. 8-36, when the effect control CPU 120 outputs a rotation stop command as the operation time elapses, but the motor control unit 409 cannot normally receive the rotation stop command, the operation accompanying the operation notice is performed. Even if time elapses, the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 will continue without stopping, but the motor control unit 409 receives the rotation start command from the effect control CPU 120 and the second rotation motor 405. Even if the rotation stop command is not received after starting the rotation of, the forced stop control is performed by the lapse of the stop time (8 seconds in the present embodiment) set to limit the rotation for a long period of time. Then, the second rotation motor 405 is forcibly stopped.

At this time, the second movable body 401 may not stop at the normal stop position, and even if the effect control CPU 120 detects that the rotating signal is OFF, the second movable body 401 is operated by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408. The initial position of the speaker may not be detected, and it may not be specified that the speaker has stopped at the normal stop position. In this case, the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R are continued. However, even in such a case, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a rotation start command, and the upper limit time (10 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after starting the operation of the second movable body 401. The light emission control of the second effect LED 406 is terminated, and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R is terminated.

As a result, when the motor control unit 409 cannot receive the rotation stop command and forcibly stops the rotation of the second rotation motor 405, the second movable body 401 does not stop at the normal stop position, and the second movable body 401 does not stop. Even if the initial position of the second movable body 401 is not detected by the two-rotation origin position detection switch 408, the lighting of the second effect LED 406 accompanying the operation notice is finished, and the sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R accompanying the operation notice are released. The output will end.

Further, if the second movable body 401 does not stop at the normal stop position, the upper limit time for ending the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R is the second rotation motor. After starting the rotation of 405, it is set longer than the stop time that forces the second rotation motor 405 to stop if the rotation stop command is not received, and the rotation stop command cannot be received. The lighting of the second effect LED 406 accompanying the operation notice and the output of the sound effect accompanying the operation notice from the speakers 8L and 8R will continue for a period longer than the period until the second rotation motor 405 is forcibly stopped. It has become.

As described above, the present embodiment includes the first invention shown below. That is, in a conventional gaming machine provided with a movable body, the movable body is moved from a first position to a position below the first position, as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-140239. Some of them were dropped to two positions by their own weight. The gaming machine described in the above patent publication has a problem that the movable body may not be able to be dropped favorably when it is dropped further downward from the second position. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of suitably moving a movable body, the gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A).
Movable bodies that can be moved from the first position (for example, the first origin position and the first origin corresponding position) (for example, the first movable body 301, the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352, the third movable portion 353). With
After stopping the movable body moved from the first position at a second position below the first position (for example, a second intermediate position and a first intermediate corresponding position), the movable body is below the second position. It is possible to move the first movable body 301 to the third position (for example, the first effect position, the first effect corresponding position) (for example, in the movable body effect of dropping the first movable body 301, the first movable body 301 is the first. 1 The first movable body 301 is moved from the intermediate position to the lower position after being dropped (moved) from the origin position and received by the driving bodies 310L and 310R at the first intermediate position. 1 Drop (move) from the intermediate position to the first production position),
Movement assisting means for assisting the movement of the movable body from the second position to the third position (for example, locking members 340L, 340R and auxiliary side walls 344L, 344R, drive bodies 310L, 310R, guide shafts 306L, 306R, The first elevating motors 308L and 308R) are provided (see FIGS. 8-19 and 8-20).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movable body can be suitably moved to the third position even after being stopped at the second position.

Specifically, after the first movable body 301 is dropped from the first origin position to the first intermediate position, the first movable body 301 is dropped (lowered) to the first effect position by lowering the drive bodies 310L and 310R. At that time, even if the first movable body 301 does not fall due to its own weight for some reason, the locking members 340L and 340R as the movement assisting means are locked in the locking recesses 319L and 319R, so that the driving bodies 310L and 310R At the same time, the first movable body 301 is lowered, that is, the downward movement of the first movable body 301 is assisted, so that the first movable body 301 can be suitably lowered to the first effect position.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The movable body (for example, the first movable body 301, the first movable body 301, which is movable by a predetermined drive source (for example, the first elevating motor 308L, 308R) and has moved from the first position (for example, the first origin position). A drive body (for example, drive bodies 310L and 310R) capable of receiving 1 movable portion 351) is provided.
After the movable body is received by the driving body at the second position (for example, the first intermediate position and the first intermediate corresponding position), the movable body is moved downward to move the movable body to the third position. (For example, it is possible to move to the first effect position, the first effect corresponding position),
At least a part of the movement assisting means is provided on the drive body (for example, on the outer side of the drive bodies 310L and 310R, locks that can be engaged with and disengaged from the locking recesses 319L and 319R of the arms 309L and 309R. Members 340L and 340R are provided facing upward. (See FIG. 8-8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to assist the movement of the movable body from the second position to the third position by using the driving body.

Specifically, the first movable body 301 can be forcibly lowered by utilizing the lowering motion of the driving bodies 310L and 310R for raising the first movable body 301 that can be dropped by its own weight, and the first movable body 301 can be forcibly lowered. Since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source or the like for assisting the descent of the body, the structure can be simplified.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
The movement assisting means
The driving body (for example, the driving body (for example,) that can be changed into a lockable state and an unlockable state that can be locked to the movable body (for example, the locking recesses 319L and 319R of the first movable body 301 and the first movable portion 351). Locking portions (for example, locking claws 340A of locking members 340L, 340R) provided on the drive bodies 310L, 310R) and
After receiving the movable body at the second position (for example, the first intermediate position and the first intermediate corresponding position), the movable body acts on the locking portion when the driving body is moved downward, thereby engaging the movable body. With the action unit (for example, the inclined wall 343L, 343R and the auxiliary side wall 344L, 344R) that changes from the stop release state to the lockable state.
(See FIGS. 8-8, 8-19, 8-20).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the locking portion can be changed to a lockable state by utilizing the downward movement of the driving body.

Specifically, the locking members 340L and 340R can be changed between the lockable state and the unlocked state by utilizing the lowering motion of the drive bodies 310L and 310R, and the locking members 340L and 340R are changed. Since it is not necessary to separately provide a drive source for the above, the structure can be simplified.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
The driving body (for example, driving bodies 310L and 310R) is an urging member (for example, a urging member (for example) that urges the locking portion (for example, the locking claw 340A of the locking members 340L and 340R) so as to be in the unlocked state. For example, it is characterized by having a coil spring (not shown).
According to this feature, the locking portion can be easily released from the locking portion when movement assistance is not required.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4.
A first guide means (for example, a guide shaft 306L) that guides one side of the movable body (for example, the first movable body 301) in the vertical direction, and
A second guide means (for example, a guide shaft 306R) that guides the other side of the movable body in the vertical direction, and
With
The drive body is provided in both the first guide means and the second guide means (for example, the drive bodies 310L and 310R forming a substantially rectangular parallelepiped are formed with through holes 332L and 332R penetrating in the vertical direction. , Guide shafts 306L and 306R are inserted into the through holes 332L and 332R. See FIG. 8-13).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movable body can be moved stably.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 3 to 5.
The locking portion (for example, the locking claw 340A of the locking member 340L, 340R) while the driving body (for example, the driving body 310L, 310R) receives the movable body (for example, the first movable body 301). Is changed to the lockable state, a predetermined gap (for example, a gap) is provided between the locking portion and the locked portion of the movable body (for example, the lower wall 319A of the locking recesses 319L and 319R). L10) is provided (see FIG. 8-19 (B)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the locking portion can be suitably changed to a lockable state, and when the moving body does not move when the driving body moves downward, the locking portion engages with the locked portion. Since it is stopped, the movement of the movable body from the second position to the third position can be suitably assisted.

Specifically, when it is not necessary to lock the locking claw 340A to the lower wall 319A of the locking recesses 319L and 319R, that is, when the first movable body 301 falls normally, the locking claw 340A is the lower wall. When it is necessary to lock the locking claw 340A to the lower wall 319A of the locking recesses 319L and 319R without being locked to the 319A, that is, when the first movable body 301 does not fall normally, The locking claw 340A is locked to the lower wall 319A. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the member from being worn by the locking claw 340A being locked to the lower wall 319A each time the first movable body 301 is dropped, but it is suitable when the first movable body 301 does not fall normally. Since it is locked to, the first movable body 301 can be suitably lowered.

In addition, the embodiment includes the second invention shown below. That is, in a conventional gaming machine provided with a movable body that can be operated, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-140239, a first movable portion that can be visually recognized by a player at a first position. By moving a movable body having a second movable portion that is difficult or impossible for the player to see on the rear side of the first movable portion in the first position from the first position to the second position, the second position is obtained. Some of the movable parts appeared on the first position side of the first movable part and became visible to the player. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, since the movable body moves from the first position to the second position and only the second movable portion appears, the moving mode of the movable body is monotonous, so that it is possible to enhance the interest. There was a problem that it could not be done. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest by the movable body, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A).
A movable body (for example, the first movable body 301) having a first movable portion (for example, the first movable portion 351) and a second movable portion (for example, the second movable portion 352) different from the first movable portion. Prepare,
The movable body is
From the first position (for example, the first origin position, the first origin corresponding position) to the third position (for example, the first effect position,) via the second position (for example, the first intermediate position, the first intermediate corresponding position). It is possible to move to the position corresponding to the first effect (for example, in the movable body effect of dropping the first movable body 301, the first movable body 301 is dropped (moved) from the first origin position, and the drive bodies 310L, 310R. After receiving at the first intermediate position, the driving bodies 310L and 310R are moved from the intermediate position to the lower position, so that the first movable body 301 is dropped (moved) from the first intermediate position to the first effect position. ),
At the first position, the first movable portion is visible to the player, and the second movable portion overlaps the rear side of the first movable portion, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see (FIG. 8-). 13),
By moving from the first position to the second position, the second movable portion appears on the first position side of the first movable portion and becomes visible to the player (see FIG. 8-15).
By moving from the second position to the third position, the first movable portion moves to a position away from the second movable portion (see FIG. 8-17).
When the movable body moves to the third position, a specific effect portion appears between the first movable portion and the second movable portion (for example, the first movable body 301 is the first from the first intermediate position. When falling to the first effect position, only the first movable portion 351 is lowered with respect to the second movable portion 352 and the third movable portion 353, so that the first movable portion 351 is in the first intermediate corresponding position. Since the second movable portion 352 is separated downward, the third movable portion 353 (specific effect unit) appears visibly from the gap generated between the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352. (See Fig. 8-17)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the second movable portion appears due to the movement of the movable body, the specific effect portion further appears, so that the player can be surprised.

Specifically, the first movable portion 351 falls from the first origin corresponding position to the first intermediate corresponding position, so that the second movable portion 352 overlaps the back side of the first movable portion 351 and cannot be visually recognized by the player. From the gap created between the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352 by moving the first movable portion 351 from the first intermediate corresponding position to the first effect corresponding position. , A new third movable unit 353 (specific production unit) appears visibly from the player.

Further, after the second movable portion 352 appears at the first timing in response to the movement of the first movable portion 351, the third movable portion separate from the second movable portion 352 at the second timing after the first timing. 353 (specific production section) appears. That is, since a plurality of production units do not appear at once, but new production units appear in stages, it is possible to give the player more surprise.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The movable body (for example, the first movable body 301) is a third movable portion different from the first movable portion (for example, the first movable portion 351) and the second movable portion (for example, the second movable portion 352). (For example, the third movable part 353)
When the movable body moves to the third position (for example, the first effect position and the first effect corresponding position), the first movable portion is used as the specific effect portion between the first movable portion and the second movable portion. 3 Make moving parts appear (see Fig. 8-17)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) provided behind the movable body (for example, the first movable body 301) is provided.
When the movable body moves to the third position (for example, the first effect position and the first effect corresponding position), the effect display is performed at the portion corresponding to the specific effect unit in the display area of the display means (for example, the effect display is performed. For example, at the timing when the third movable portion 353 appears, the effect control CPU 120 places the character image Z1 as a specific effect image in the portion corresponding to the base portion 390A of the third movable portion 353 in the display area of the image display device 5. Is displayed as a stereoscopic 3D image (see FIG. 8-17).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since an image that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed on the specific effect unit, the player can be surprised.

Specifically, the third movable portion is formed from the gap created between the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352 by moving the first movable portion 351 from the first intermediate corresponding position to the first effect corresponding position. Not only does the 353 (specific effect unit) appear visibly from the player, but the character image Z1 displayed on the image display device 5 can be visually recognized through the base unit 390A of the third movable unit 353. , The effect of the first movable portion 351 and the image displayed by the image display device 5 can be realized.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
In the first movable portion (for example, the first movable portion 351), the movable body (for example, the first movable body 301) is the first from the second position (for example, the first intermediate position and the first intermediate corresponding position). When moving to three positions (for example, the first effect position and the first effect corresponding position), the first state (for example, the united state) is transformed into the second state (for example, the separated state) different from the first state. It is possible (see Figures 8-15 and 8-17).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the first movable portion 351 is deformed in response to the movement of the first movable portion 351, the player can be surprised.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 4.
The first movable portion (for example, the first movable portion 351) is a special effect portion (for example, a separated state) that appears by transforming from the first state (for example, a united state) to the second state (for example, a separated state). It has a rotating member 363) (see FIG. 8-17).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the special effect unit can be visually recognized only when the first movable unit 351 is deformed, so that the player can be surprised.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The first movable portion (for example, the first movable portion 351) is
With the base part (for example, base part 361),
A plurality of movable members (for example, movable members 362A to 362D) that can operate with respect to the base portion,
Have,
It can be transformed into a first state in which the plurality of movable members are close to each other (for example, a united state) and a second state in which the plurality of movable members are separated (for example, a separated state).
It is characterized by having suction means (for example, magnets 385A to 385H) for maintaining the plurality of movable members in the first state.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from being deformed to the second state when it is not intended.

Specifically, when the first movable body 301 falls to the first intermediate position, the plurality of movable members 362A to 362D move from the close position to the separated position due to the impact of the drop, so that the movable members 362A to 362A to It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the 362Ds.

In addition, the embodiment includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine provided with an movable movable body and a light emitting means capable of emitting light, the control of the movable body is synchronized with, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-242876. Some of them control the light emitting means. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, when a movable body has a problem and cannot operate normally, the light emission control is continuously executed without ending, giving the player a sense of discomfort. There was a problem that there was something. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of appropriately producing a performance according to a movable body, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A).
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body executes a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. The part that executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb019 in the moving body movement processing.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute light emission control according to the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A).
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). CPU 120 executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb020 in the moving body operation processing.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be suitably executed.

Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 outputs a rotation start command in accordance with the operation notice and operates the second movable body 401, the rotation stop command is output as the operation time elapses, and the second movable body 401 is operated. When the first end condition is satisfied by stopping at the normal stop position, the lighting of the second effect LED 406 accompanying the operation notice is ended, and the output of the sound effect accompanying the operation notice from the speakers 8L and 8R is finished. At the same time, a rotation stop command is output as the operation time elapses, and the operation of the second movable body 401 is stopped, but the second movable body 401 does not stop at the normal stop position and the first end condition is not satisfied. Even in this case, after starting the rotation of the second movable body 401, even when the second end condition due to the elapse of the upper limit time ends, the lighting of the second effect LED 406 accompanying the operation notice ends, and the operation notice Since the output of the sound effects accompanying the speaker 8L and 8R is terminated, even if the second movable body 401 cannot be stopped at the normal stop position and the first termination condition is not satisfied, it is for the second production accompanying the operation notice. It is possible to prevent the output of the sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R due to the lighting of the LED 406 and the operation notice from continuing. That is, it is possible to preferably execute light emission control and sound output control according to the operation of the second movable body 401.

Further, even if the second movable body 401 performs a predetermined rotation operation in an operation notice or the like, a large number of operation patterns (6 seconds, 4 seconds, 2 seconds, etc.) having different operation times as in the above embodiment). If there is, the data capacity will increase if similar light emission data and sound data are set for each operation pattern. On the other hand, when trying to stop the operation only by time management, if the second movable body 401 does not operate for some reason, the light emission control and the sound control cannot be ended. Therefore, while reducing the data capacity, even if a problem such as the inability to detect the second movable body 401 occurs, the light emission control or the sound control can be terminated after a lapse of a predetermined time.

In the present embodiment, both the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control from the sound effect speakers 8L and 8R are performed according to the operation of the second movable body 401 accompanying the operation notice. However, in a configuration in which the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 is performed at least according to the operation of the second movable body 401 accompanying the operation notice, when the second movable body 401 is operated, the second movable body 401 stops normally. When the first end condition by stopping at the position is satisfied, the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 accompanying the operation notice is ended, and the second movable body 401 does not stop at the normal stop position, and the first end. Even if the condition is not satisfied, the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 accompanying the operation notice is performed even when the second end condition due to the elapse of the upper limit time after starting the rotation of the second movable body 401 is completed. Even in the configuration of termination, light emission control according to the operation of the second movable body 401 can be preferably executed in the same manner as described above.

Further, in a configuration in which sound output control from the sound effect speakers 8L and 8R is performed at least according to the operation of the second movable body 401 accompanying the operation notice, when the second movable body 401 is operated, the second movable body 401 is operated. When the first end condition is satisfied by stopping at the normal stop position, the sound output control from the sound effect speakers 8L and 8R accompanying the operation notice is ended, and the second movable body 401 is at the normal stop position. Even if the first end condition is not satisfied without stopping, the effect of the operation notice is also when the second end condition due to the elapse of the upper limit time after starting the rotation of the second movable body 401 is completed. Even in the configuration in which the sound output control from the sound speakers 8L and 8R is terminated, the sound output control according to the operation of the second movable body 401 can be suitably executed in the same manner as described above.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
An operation end detecting means (for example, a second rotation origin position) capable of detecting that the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401) has completed the predetermined operation (the initial position is detected when the rotating signal is OFF). Detection switch 408) and
Timekeeping means that can time (for example, upper limit timer)
With
The control means
After the movable body starts its operation, when it is detected by the operation end detecting means that the movable body has finished the predetermined operation (the initial position is detected when the rotating signal is OFF), the first It is determined that the end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) is satisfied.
When the movable body starts the operation, the time counting by the time measuring means (upper limit time timer) is started, and the movable body ends the operation, but the first end condition is not satisfied and the time measuring means (upper limit time timer) is not satisfied. ), When the time measured by the above reaches a predetermined time (upper limit time), it is determined that the second end condition (upper limit time elapses) is satisfied.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably perform control according to a predetermined operation of the movable body.

Specifically, the second rotation origin position detection switch 408 that can detect that the second movable body 401 has stopped at the normal stop position, and the time from the start of the operation of the second movable body 401 are measured. It is equipped with an upper limit time timer, and after the operation of the second movable body 401 is started, the operation of the second movable body 401 is stopped and the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408. It is determined that the first end condition is satisfied when it is specified that the second movable body 401 has stopped at the normal stop position, and when the second movable body 401 starts the operation, the upper limit time timer is used. The time counting was started and the operation of the second movable body 401 was completed, but the initial position of the second movable body 401 was not detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408, and the first end condition was not satisfied by the upper limit time timer. Since it is determined that the second end condition is satisfied when the timed time reaches the upper limit time, it is possible to preferably execute the light emission control and the sound output control according to the operation of the second movable body 401.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 3.
The control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) is the timing means (upper limit time timer) when the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) is satisfied. ) Is finished.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably perform control according to a predetermined operation of the movable body.

Specifically, after the operation of the second movable body 401 is started, the operation of the second movable body 401 is stopped, and the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408. 2 When it is specified that the movable body 401 has stopped at the normal stop position and the first end condition is satisfied, the time counting by the upper limit time timer is ended after that, so that unnecessary processing is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably execute the light emission control and the sound output control according to the operation of the second movable body 401.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
A movable body control means (for example, a motor control unit 409) that controls the operation of the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401) is provided.
The movable body control means
When the start condition (reception of the rotation start command) is satisfied, the control to start the operation of the movable body (rotation start control) is performed.
When the stop condition (reception of the rotation stop command) corresponding to the predetermined operation is satisfied, or when the specific time (stop time) elapses without satisfying the stop condition after starting the operation of the movable body. It is characterized in that it controls to stop the operation of the movable body.
According to this feature, since the operation of the movable body is stopped even when the end condition according to the predetermined operation is not satisfied, it is possible to prevent a problem caused by the inability to end the operation of the movable body.

Specifically, the motor control unit 409 that controls the second rotation motor 405 is provided, and the motor control unit 409 receives a rotation start command from the effect control CPU 120 to satisfy the start condition. Control is performed to start the rotation of the two-rotation motor 405, and by receiving a rotation stop command from the effect control CPU 120, control is performed to stop the operation of the second rotation motor 405 when the stop condition is satisfied. 2 After stopping the operation of the movable body 401 and starting the rotation of the second rotation motor 405, even if the stop condition is not satisfied without receiving the rotation stop command, the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 is started. When a predetermined stop time elapses after the operation, control is performed to forcibly stop the second rotation motor 405, and the operation of the second movable body 401 is stopped. Since the operation of the second movable body 401 is stopped even if the corresponding end condition is not satisfied, it is possible to prevent a problem caused by the inability to end the operation of the second movable body 401.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 5.
The predetermined time (for example, the upper limit time) is longer than the specific time (for example, the stop time).
According to this feature, even when the operation of the movable body ends without satisfying the end condition according to the predetermined operation, the control of light emission can be ended after the operation of the movable body is completed, so that the player can end the light emission control. You don't have to feel uncomfortable.

Specifically, after starting the operation of the second movable body 401, if the first end condition is not satisfied, the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control from the sound effect speakers 8L and 8R are ended. The upper limit time for forcibly stopping the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 after starting the operation of the second movable body 401 is set to be longer than the stop time for forcibly stopping the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 when the stop condition is not satisfied. After starting the operation of the second movable body 401, even if the rotation of the second rotating motor 405 is forcibly stopped when the stop condition is not satisfied, after the operation of the second movable body 401 is finished. Since the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control from the sound effect speakers 8L and 8R can be terminated, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The predetermined operation includes a plurality of types of operation patterns (for example, operation times of 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds) in which the operation times of the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401) are different.
The predetermined time (for example, the upper limit time) is a common time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the longest operation time (for example, 6 seconds) among the plurality of types of operation patterns.
According to this feature, it is not necessary to set a predetermined time according to each of a plurality of types of operation patterns, so that the control load can be reduced.

Specifically, when the second movable body 401 does not stop at the normal stop position, the upper limit time for ending the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R is a plurality of upper limits. When the longest operating time (6 seconds) of the operating time is determined, the operating time elapses after the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 starts, and the second rotation motor 405 stops by the normal stop control. It is set longer than the time until, and the common upper limit time is applied regardless of the determined operation time, without setting the upper limit time for each of multiple types of operation time. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
The movable body (for example, the second movable body) can rotate.
Origin position detecting means (for example, second rotation origin position detecting switch 408) capable of detecting the origin position (initial position) of the movable body, and
A movable body control means (for example, a motor control unit 409) that controls the operation of the movable body (second movable body), and
With
The movable body control means detects the origin position after the stop condition is satisfied when the stop condition (reception of the rotation stop command) corresponding to the predetermined operation is satisfied after starting the rotation operation of the movable body. After the means detects the origin position (initial position), the control of rotating at the maximum speed is continued until the deceleration start position (braking start position) is reached, and the deceleration start position (braking start position) is directed toward the stop position. Perform deceleration control (see Fig. 8-33)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the stop condition is satisfied, the movable body can be stopped by a certain amount of rotation regardless of the position, so that the appearance of the stop operation of the movable body is improved.

Specifically, after the motor control unit 409 receives the rotation stop command and the stop condition is satisfied, the second rotation origin position detection switch 408 detects the initial position of the second movable body 401 before the braking start position. The state of rotating at the maximum speed is maintained until it reaches the limit, and when it reaches the braking start position, it controls to decelerate toward the stop position, and when it reaches the stop position, it controls to stop the second rotation motor 405. When the stop condition is satisfied, the second movable body 401 can be stopped by a certain amount of rotation at any position, whereby the decorative portions 423A to 423C are in the second effect state. Since the time from the return to the first effect state is secured, the appearance of the stop operation of the second movable body 401 can be improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable portion 351 of the first movable body 301 as a movable body corresponds to the first origin corresponding position (first position) and the first effect corresponding to the position below the first origin corresponding position. Although the embodiment in which the vehicle can move in the vertical direction with respect to the position (second position) has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the horizontal direction and the front-back direction between the first position and the second position It may be movable to.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 301 as a movable body can be dropped by its own weight from the first origin position to the first effect position via the first intermediate position. Is not limited to this, and may be movable in the vertical direction by a predetermined drive source. That is, the movement assisting means in the first invention is not limited to those that assist the movement when the first movable portion 351 that can be dropped by its own weight moves downward from the first intermediate corresponding position. When the 1 movable portion 351 is moved downward from the first intermediate corresponding position by a predetermined drive source, the movement may be assisted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 301 as a movable body exemplifies a form having a first movable portion 351 and a second movable portion 352 and a third movable portion 353. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the first invention and the third invention, it suffices to have at least one movable portion. Further, in the second invention, it suffices to have at least two movable parts.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first movable body 301 as a movable body, the first movable portion 351 and the third movable portion 353 can move in the vertical direction, while the second movable portion 352 moves in the front-rear direction. Although the form that is movable and can be rotated at the front position is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode of the second movable portion 352 and the third movable portion 353 is the first movable portion. It does not have to be the same as the operation mode of the unit 351.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second movable portion 352 moves from the rear first origin corresponding position to the front first central corresponding position in response to the movement of the first movable portion 351 to the first center corresponding position. However, the second invention is not limited to this, and the second movable portion 352 can be visually recognized by the player according to the movement of the first movable portion 351 to the first center corresponding position. If it appears in, it may be fixed in advance to the first center corresponding position or the like so as not to be movable. Further, if the third movable portion 353 appears so as to be visible to the player in response to the movement of the first movable portion 351 from the first center corresponding position to the first effect corresponding position, the first center It may be fixed in advance at a corresponding position or the like so as not to be movable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable portion 351 of the first movable body 301 is illustrated to be moved and guided in the vertical direction by the left and right guide shafts 306L and 306R, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, movement guidance may be performed by only one of the left and right guide shafts 306L and 306R. Further, the guide shafts 306L and 306R also serve as guide means for vertically moving and guiding the drive bodies 310L and 310R, but are separate from the guide shafts 306L and 306R for vertically moving and guiding the drive bodies 310L and 310R. The first movable portion 351 may be guided by the guiding means.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the driving bodies 310L and 310R as receiving means for receiving the first movable portion 351 at the first intermediate corresponding position and the first effect corresponding position cause the moving means 303L for raising the first movable portion 351. , 303R has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the receiving means for receiving the first movable portion 351 at the first intermediate corresponding position and the first effect corresponding position, and the first 1 The moving means 303L and 303R for raising the movable portion 351 may be provided separately. As a receiving means for receiving the first movable portion 351 at the first intermediate corresponding position or the first effect corresponding position, for example, a locking member 318A operated by the first effect solenoids 318L and 318R may be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movement assisting means includes the locking members 340L and 340R (locking means) provided on the driving bodies 310L and 310R, and the locking members 340L according to the operation of the driving bodies 310L and 310R. , 340R exemplifies a mode in which the locking member changes from the unlocked state to the lockable state by contacting the auxiliary side walls 344L and 344R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the locking members 340L and 340R are not limited to this. , The lockable state may be changed from the unlocked state by a predetermined drive source. Further, the locking members 340L and 340R may be provided on a moving body or the like provided separately from the driving bodies 310L and 310R. Further, the first movable portion 351 may be provided with the locking members 340L and 340R, and the driving bodies 310L and 310R may be provided with the locking recesses 319L and 319R.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the locking members 340L and 340R provided on the descendable drive bodies 310L and 310R as movement assisting means are locked and connected to the first movable portion 351 to connect the drive bodies 310L and 310R. Although the embodiment of assisting the movement of the first movable portion 351 from the first central corresponding position is illustrated by pulling down together, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the guide shafts 306L and 306R. Even if a movement assisting member is provided above the arms 309L and 309R and the first movable portion 351 is pushed down from above by the movement assisting member, the movement of the first movable portion 351 from the first center corresponding position is assisted. Good.

Further, the movement assisting means applies some kind of impact to the first movable portion 351 (for example, the first movable portion 351 and the guide shafts 306L and 306R are vibrated by the vibration motor, and other members are moved to the first movable portion 351. It may include a device that eliminates the catch of the first movable portion 351 by contacting the first movable portion 351 or the like. Therefore, the movement assisting means may be provided at a location other than the drive bodies 310L and 310R (for example, the first movable portion 351 and the cover bodies 304L and 304R).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the locking members 340L, 340R and the like as the movement assisting means move the first movable portion 351 at the first intermediate corresponding position between the first origin corresponding position and the first effect corresponding position. An example of a mode in which the movement is assisted when moving to the first effect corresponding position after stopping is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the first origin corresponding position is moved to the first effect corresponding position. It may assist the movement when it is moved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable portion 351 moves from the first intermediate corresponding position to the first effect corresponding position, so that the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352 are separated from the gap. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which not only the three movable parts 353 (specific effect parts) appear visibly from the player, but also the character image Z1 is displayed through the base part 390A of the third movable part 353. Not limited to this, from the gap created between the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352 by moving the first movable portion 351 from the first intermediate corresponding position to the first effect corresponding position. As long as the specific effect unit appears, the effect image such as the character image Z1 may not be displayed. That is, the specific effect unit may be a structure such as the third movable unit 353, or may be a specific portion of the display area of the image display device 5 capable of displaying the character image Z1 or the like.

Further, when the specific effect unit is used as a specific portion of the display area of the image display device 5, the first movable portion 351 is not arranged at a position corresponding to the specific portion and a transparent member such as the third movable portion 353 is arranged. The specific portion may be directly visible from the gap formed between the second movable portion 352 and the second movable portion 352. Further, if it is an effect unit that can be visually recognized from the gap generated between the first movable portion 351 and the second movable portion 352, it can operate like the third movable portion 353 linked to the first movable portion 351. It does not have to be a movable body.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable portion 351 is configured to be deformable from the combined state to the separated state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable portion 351 is not limited to this. Does not have to be deformable. Further, the deformation mode is also arbitrary, and may be transformed into a form different from the separated state and the combined state as illustrated in the above-described embodiment.

Further, in the above embodiment, the initial position of the second movable body 401 is detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408 at the braking start position and the stop position, but the braking start position and the stop position are not necessarily the same. The initial position of the second movable body 401 does not have to be detected by the second rotation origin position detection switch 408, and both the braking start position or the stop position, the control start position and the stop position detect the second rotation origin position. Even if the initial position of the second movable body 401 is not detected by the switch 408, after the motor control unit 409 receives the rotation stop command and the stop condition is satisfied, the second rotation origin position detection switch 408 is used for the second position. After the initial position of the movable body 401 is detected, it maintains the state of rotating at the maximum speed until it reaches the braking start position, and when it reaches the braking start position, it controls deceleration toward the stop position and reaches the stop position. If the configuration is such that the second rotation motor 405 is stopped by reaching the position, the second movable body 401 can be stopped at a constant amount of rotation at any position when the stop condition is satisfied. Therefore, the appearance of the stopping operation of the second movable body 401 can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second movable body 401 that rotates as a movable body is applied, but a movable body that moves from the first position to a second position different from the first position is applied. Alternatively, a movable body that does not rotate but returns to a specific position from a specific position via another position may be applied. Even in such a configuration, light emission control and sound output control are performed according to the movement of the movable body, and the first end condition is satisfied when the movable body finishes a predetermined operation (for example, from the first position to the first position). In the configuration in which the light emission control and the sound output control are terminated by moving the movable body to two positions and moving the movable body from a specific position to another position), the operation of the movable body is completed, but the first end is completed. By configuring the light emission control and the sound output control to be terminated when a predetermined time elapses without satisfying the conditions, the light emission control and the sound output control according to the operation of the movable body are suitably executed as described above. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the movable body (second movable body 401) is operated by the second rotation motor 405 composed of a stepping motor, but the movable body is operated by an actuator such as a motor or a solenoid other than the stepping motor. The configuration may be such that the movable body is operated by using an urging member such as a spring, or the movable body may be operated by its own weight.

In the above-described embodiment, the movable body (second movable body 401) is controlled to operate as one form of the advance notice effect, but the effect after developing into the reach state, the effect during the jackpot state, and the probability fluctuation It may be configured to control the operation of the movable body (second movable body 401) as one form of the effect of the inside.

In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R, and receives the rotation start command and the rotation stop command from the effect control CPU 120 to control the motor. The control unit 409 controls the operation of the second rotation motor 405. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R, and also performs the second rotation. It may be configured to control the operation of the motor 405. Further, the control unit other than the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to control the light emission of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R based on the command from the effect control CPU 120. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to control the operation of the second rotation motor 405, or the motor control unit 409 may receive a rotation start command and a rotation stop command from the effect control CPU 120. It may be configured to control the operation of the second rotation motor 405. Further, the display control unit 123 that controls the display of the image display device 5 gives a command to the effect control CPU 120 according to the display content of the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 issues a command from the display control unit 123. Based on this, the control for operating the second rotation motor 405 may be performed, and the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed.

In the above embodiment, when the second movable body 401 does not stop at the normal stop position, there are a plurality of upper limit times for ending the light emission control of the second effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R. When the longest operating time (6 seconds) is determined, the operating time elapses after the rotation of the second rotation motor 405 starts, and the second rotation motor 405 stops by the normal stop control. It is set longer than the time until the operation time is set, and the common upper limit time is applied regardless of the determined operation time. However, the upper limit time is set for each operation time and depends on the determined operation time. The upper limit time may be selected. With such a configuration, even if the second movable body 401 does not stop at the normal stop position, the second movable body 401 is adjusted to the operating time of the second movable body 401. It is possible to end the light emission control of the effect LED 406 and the sound output control of the speakers 8L and 8R.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is provided as a control means capable of controlling light emission and sound output according to a predetermined operation of the second movable body 401, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second movable body 401. When the first end condition is satisfied because the second movable body 401 finishes the predetermined operation, or when the second movable body 401 finishes the operation, the first end condition is Although the embodiment in which the light emission control and the sound output control are terminated when the second termination condition is satisfied due to the elapse of a predetermined time without being satisfied, the present invention is not limited to this, and is for effect control. In a device in which the CPU 120 is capable of effect control other than light emission control and sound output control (for example, control of a vibration motor for vibrating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B) according to a predetermined operation of the second movable body 401. , When the second movable body 401 executes a predetermined operation, when the first end condition is satisfied due to the completion of the predetermined operation by the second movable body 401, or when the second movable body 401 ends the operation. The effect control may be terminated when the second end condition is satisfied due to the elapse of a predetermined time without satisfying the first end condition.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming machine having a predetermined number of balls is used. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

In the case of a slot machine, the gaming area of the present invention corresponds to, for example, a variable display area in which a variable display of a symbol is executed by a variable display device such as a reel. Further, the display device of the present invention corresponds to a variable display device having the above-mentioned symbol (for example, a reel or a liquid crystal display).

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

Other game machines of the present invention include a game machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko game machine 1A), an movable movable body (for example, a second movable body 401), and light emitting light capable of emitting light. The means (for example, the second effect LED 406) and the control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120) are provided. In the control means, when the movable body executes a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at the initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body ends the predetermined operation. When the first termination condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) is satisfied, or when the movable body is terminated, the first termination condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of a predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is movable). A portion that executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb019 in the body movement processing), and further, a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player is executed. A possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) and a title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120) are provided, and the title notification means includes the suggestion effect. It is possible to notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period elapses from the start of (for example, a portion displaying the title of the reach effect as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D) and 9-2 (F)). ), The suggestion effect execution means includes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A and super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D and super reach E) as the suggestion effect. In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 9-2 (H)). As shown in the above, a gaming machine (a part displaying the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute light emission control according to the movement of the movable body. In addition, since the title can be notified according to the suggestion effect, the effect of the effect is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A), and a movable body (for example, a second movable body 401) that can be operated and a sound. Sound output means that can output (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and control means that can control to output sound from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body (for example, effect control). When the movable body executes a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses). When the first termination condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the completion of the predetermined operation of the movable body is satisfied, or the movable body has completed the operation. Control to output sound from the sound output means when the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied because the predetermined time elapses without satisfying the first end condition (sound output control). (For example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb020 in the movable body operation process), and further, the control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) and a title notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The title notifying means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9-2 (D) and 9-2 (F)). ), The suggestion effect execution means includes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B). For example, it is possible to execute (reach production of super reach D and super reach E), and the title notification means is a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), a portion displaying the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D).

According to such a configuration, sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be suitably executed. In addition, since the title can be notified according to the suggestion effect, the effect of the effect is improved.

Further, as an example of the form of a gaming machine in which light emission control and sound output control according to the movement of a movable body can be suitably executed and the effect of effect is improved, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) advantageous to the player. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a gaming state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and a suggestion effect executing means (for example, a reach effect) that can execute a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests control to the advantageous state. The effect control CPU 120) and a title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120) are provided, and the title notification means is when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect. It is possible to notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect (for example, the part displaying the title of the reach effect as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D) and 9-2 (F)), and the suggestion effect execution means is As the suggestion effect, at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) can be executed. In the second suggestion effect, the notification means notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), Super Reach D. The part displaying the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the above). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, the feature portions of other form examples will be described. Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. -2, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". , PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 9-1 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super The order is higher in the order of reach B <super reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 9-1 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled and the effect of the effect is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature section 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9-2 and 9-3 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop, and the reach mode is established. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction portion of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the image display device 5 has the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-2 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9-2 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A, which is confronted by, is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-2 (F). (Here, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is changed. Be notified. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9-2 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B, which is confronted by, is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, Super Reach A (Fig. 9-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 9-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (Fig. 9-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the degree of jackpot reliability of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9-2 (I) shows the same production contents as those in FIG. 9-2 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), the Super Reach production dedicated to Super Reach D is executed. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character "SP Reach E") is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. By doing so, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the expected degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expected degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, or the expected degree may be suggested. The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 9-3 (D), the image 31AK013 is displayed. A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute variable display during the reach effect of the super reach. , The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character that is residently displayed during the variable display, and the display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 9-4 As shown in (B), the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 9-4, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. It may be displayed. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but first five white stars are displayed, and the stage It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 is expected to move. The effect of fitting into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 9-5 (D) and 9-5 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 9-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-5 (A) to 9-5, black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step, but the number of black stars is two. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, half a black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in a different effect mode. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

9-5 (G) to 9-5 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 9-5 (A) to 9-5 (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-5 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-5 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and is expected. The effect of fitting into one of the white rhombuses of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 9-5 (J) and 9-5 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 9-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 9-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive effect) may be made different in the effect mode. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-6 (B). A development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character "SP Reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. Is notified, and as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), the title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 9-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 9-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the superreach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 9-9 (A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Those that change, those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of change timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined as one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-9 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in Fig. 9-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). ), The reliability of the jackpot is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, although the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being decided by the decision ratio shown in FIG. 9-9, the decision ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the decision ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The rate of change in which production mode (ratio of action) may be different from that of the dialogue notice, or the rate of change in what color (in what stage) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 31AK-1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 9-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

9-10 and 9-11 are diagrams showing an example of the super reach effect operation in the modified example 31AK-1 in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character character 31AK041. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (C) to (F) and 9-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. The large button image changes to 31AK047.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which bullets are fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 9-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is centered as shown in FIG. 9-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 9-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability when it is done is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 9-10 and 9-11, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but the reach effects shown in FIGS. 9-10 and 9-11 are omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 9-8.

(Modification example 31AK-2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 9-12 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 9-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 9-12 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 9-12 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (a) and 9-12 (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 9-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 9-12 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 9-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 9-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 9-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 9-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 9-8 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of Feature 207SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the game board. The right side of the image display device 5 in No. 2 is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the game ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-7, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that the substrate case 207SG201 can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 207SG003 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 207SG201, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special figure, 1st reserved display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Device 207SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 207SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 207SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 207SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 207SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variation display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variation display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

Regarding the case where the variation display result is a big hit in the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A uses two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type to display the variation display result. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variation display result is a big hit in the variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B displays the variation with two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 207SG025A and second hold display 207SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the unit 207SG, the light is turned off toward the left side).

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-6, for example, when one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the two LEDs on the left of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 due to the execution of the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the round display 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position, respectively, during variable display or the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 207SG332.

FIG. 10-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the determination result (pre-determination result) of whether the variation display result is "miss", "big hit", or "small hit". ), And different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variation display result designation command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variation display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variation display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variation display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start). The command E103H is a set value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value changed state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the set value change operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the set value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-9, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 10-9, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 10-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "missing", the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and varies. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to be a fluctuation pattern that causes super reach loss.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-13, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), and FIG. The display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -11 (C), the display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), and the display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 10-12 (B). Set value 5), display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 10-12 (C), jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), FIG. 10-13 ( In addition to the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal map display result judgment table (not shown), and the normal figure A fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game field side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the game field side. Become.

10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C), in each display result determination table, the game state is a probable change state ( In the high accuracy state), more judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of the "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the jackpot game state when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and the setting Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

Further, in each display result judgment table, the judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Has been done. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C), regardless of the gaming state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is set to 1/200. It should be noted that the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value.

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value is shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and 10-12. When any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIGS. 10-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Further, MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C) is the probability (ratio) of a big hit and a small hit. Indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming. Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 has the display results shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-11 (C) and 10-12 (A) to 10-12 (C). It is designed to judge whether to make a big hit or a small hit using a judgment table, but whether to set a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table separately for each set value and make the fluctuation display result a big hit Whether or not it is a small hit may be individually determined.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

10-13 (A) and 10-13 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 10-13 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, in FIG. 10-13 (B), the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14. In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (A) and 10-15 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 775 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 21 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 160 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 120 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 290 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and is lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the type of big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss includes the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not implemented for time reduction control, and the low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed, are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 5 to 8 are obtained. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701. ~ 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control (PA1-4). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) of PA2-2) and super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 10-10 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

In this way, when the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to D for loss are used, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the fluctuation patterns of super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. When each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are completely the same between the set values as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are between the set values. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratio of all the variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value set. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is lost, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super reach α is illustrated. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The fluctuation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. Occasionally, by winning a start, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time becomes long.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (A) to 10-16 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for loss that differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss is set regardless of the numerical value of 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of random value assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss). Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rate at which the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is the fluctuation of the super reach loss regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed by a pattern.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-2 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on The number of stored data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are used as pending data. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passing gate, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 (B) and 10-17 (C), the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 ball in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-19, the main board 11 executes a control for switching the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set in is "5", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear process for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa010 (207SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

In the 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 207SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (whether or not the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed) ( 207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in the 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGsa023), and as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (207SGsa026; N), the processes of 207SGsa025 and 207SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (207SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

The feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in the 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (207SGSa029) and allow interrupts (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGsa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. 10-26. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change. , "E." is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the process of 207SGsa032-207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008. This may be executed not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa008; Y or 207SGSa021 but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y).

FIG. 10-21 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first specifies the second address from the beginning in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) at the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) that stores the RAM clear flag. Whether or not it is determined (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGsa042, and if the specified address is the address that stores the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is continued. Specify the address of 207SGSa042 and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear process ends.

As shown in FIG. 10-21 (B), addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment for each storage area. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. Temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 or later) store game information including special figure hold memory, normal figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value indicating a factory-shipped state (for example, a set value "0") is set at the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where a value indicating a factory default state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be executed. You may be urged to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by displaying on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in an address other than the set value.

The feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as a game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted. , The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing a set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa052, FIG. 10-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode that is not any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 10-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in the 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Set "1" (reset the set value to "1") and proceed to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any of 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In the 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process execution to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGsa055 and 207SGsa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa056; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa057).

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). If there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. Update the content (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "1", is set as a temporary set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than the "2", is provisionally set. A value 1 larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a set value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 is stored in the address F001 or the process of storing a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 by repeatedly executing the processes of 207SGsa062 to 207SGsa065. The process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary set value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGsa069; Y), the temporary setting value is further stored in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the set value stored in the address F000 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGsa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. When the value of the set value and the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 are different (207SGsa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGsa071, the temporary set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and also starts lighting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B is started (see 207SGSa102, FIG. 10-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 has only one segment among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode in which none of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C shown in FIG. 10-6). Starts lighting (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cutoff detection process execution start wait timer for waiting until the power supply disconnection detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer is set to -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power failure detection process execution start waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is not timer-out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGsa106 and 207SGsa107 are repeatedly executed, and when the power-off detection process execution start wait timer is timer-out (207SGsa107; Y). Executes the power failure detection process (207SGSa108). The power failure detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power failure detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power failure detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of the lock switch 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is finished (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B All segments constituting the above are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGsa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command (207SGSa115) to the effect control board 12, and ends the set value confirmation process.

In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display 207SG131 are lit, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second By starting the holding display 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232 blinking, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., can see the pachinko game machine 1 changing the set value or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, among the segments constituting the round display 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. Although the embodiment in which only one LED is lit is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 are the jackpot A and the jackpot shown in FIG. 10-6. As long as it does not correspond to either B or the jackpot C, the lighting mode is not particularly limited.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), at the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the mode corresponding to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is changed in set value. It may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open. By turning on the and the clear switch, the setting value change process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (A) to 10-25 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 10-17) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value change process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value change process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated while the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. (Clear switch is OFF) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 (A), 10-25 (B), and 10-25 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is first turned off by turning off the power. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 10-17) is completed. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses a different number of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup or the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing a power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If there is no power off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends, and if there is a power off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (207SGS082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the CPU 103 executed the same power failure detection process (207SGS200) as the above-mentioned 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. Later, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 10-29 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the command reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed, and the command reception waiting timer waits until the timer goes out.

Then, when the command reception waiting timer goes out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input processing described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1). (Information including the number of super reach times, etc.) is cleared (207SGS409), and the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 are notified. The RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification is executed) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image in the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 in the image display device 5 are cleared. A clerk at the game hall who started the pachinko game machine 1 after displaying the notification image 207SG005M1) that notifies the fact, emitting the game effect lamp 9, and outputting the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It suffices to be able to notify that the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. Then, after executing the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Further, when the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the set value is changed. The set value-related notification process for executing the notification that the operation is in progress (notification during setting value change) and the notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification during setting value confirmation) is executed (207SGS412).

In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (B) and 10-36 (C), the image display device 5 is used as a notification during setting value change and a notification during setting value confirmation. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the set value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the set value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. Generally, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, and a game hall clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. That is, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of a game hall who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot determine from the display of the image display device 5 whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as the notification during setting value change and the notification during confirmation of set value, the pachinko game machine is sent to the clerk of the game hall who changes or confirms the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is activated in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the first movable body (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. It is designed to do so (see Figure 10-35).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-33 and 10-34. FIG. 10-33 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, and FIG. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control at the time of non-detection.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect position (second position), and are provided so as to be able to reciprocate from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the return movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during the variable display or the like.

The effect control CPU 120 is movable when the detected portion of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. When the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the game island, or when the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the effect is executed, the motor is removed. The moving body 207SG3211 and 207SG322 have moved from the origin position due to the vibration of the gaming machine due to a movable body error (operation abnormality) such as the moving body 207SG321 and 207SG322 cannot be confirmed to return to the origin or cannot operate due to adjustment, failure, or catching. If it is at a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the coalescing position such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the operation control at the time of non-detection in FIG. 10-22), the origin is returned. Execute non-detection operation control for. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located at positions away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the direction of the origin position.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation check operation control is executed. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and are the control speeds set for operating the movable bodies 207SG321. , 207SG 322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and the other moving section between the origin position and the effect position, one moving section. Movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 when the mode is different between the moving section and other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when the moving section rises and falls even in the same moving section. The operating speed when the is actually operated may differ from the control speed. Further, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322's actual operating speeds are not always the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, and size of each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are determined. When there are differences in the operating mode, operating distance, driving mechanism, etc., the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 10-34 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control, the set actual operation confirmation process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the control speed set in the above. Specifically, it controls to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate to stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate to stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change in the order of high speed → low speed. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of, even when the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed are higher than the minimum speed. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are controlled so as to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is reached. It will be described as operating.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration are the minimum speeds in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG3211 is controlled so as to be the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when the device is stopped at the effect position. After the 207SG322 is surely decelerated, the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control, it is moved from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the feature unit 207SG of the form of, the lowest control speed among the control speeds always set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is always set so as to be the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322.

In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. When operated at the control speed when accelerating, that is, at high speed, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion, or they can move from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged. Control.

Returning to FIG. 10-29, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. It is determined whether or not the set value early change end flag indicating that the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed is set (207SGS415). When the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N) Proceed to 207SGS412, and when the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y). Proceed to 207SGS417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the processing of 207SGS416.

In the 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change is completed. It is determined whether or not the flag is set (207SGS420).

In the 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as the 207SGS413 is performed. ) And the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as the 207SGS414, and the first in the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), 207SGS414, and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423). It is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and when the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) proceeds to 207SGS427.

As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). When the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started. To execute. As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (A), after the completion of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 sends the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification. When a command is received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process is performed again. The second movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (B), of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed. When the CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. If the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in the absence state, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed again after the second movable body initialization process is completed. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization process is not yet completed. In that case, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed before the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initial stage being executed Only the conversion process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

If the 207SGS411 does not receive the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the error designation command is received (207SGS425). .. When the error specification command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification process (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error specification command is executed, and when the error specification command is not received (207SGS425; N), the error notification process is executed. , 207 SGS 403.

As the error notification in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (D), if the image display device 5 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command. Good.

As described above, in the effect control main process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the hot start, the player information (the player information). While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. since receiving the input of, from the RAM 122, the information for directing (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. ) And the set value information (a numerical value of any of "1" to "6" corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing setting value information is overwritten (updated and stored).

That is, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state. There is.

Then, in the 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception. Start displaying the initial symbol according to the command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as the initial symbol. Further, when the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 is displayed as an initial symbol from the left. The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

In the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. If it is set, the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is higher than when it is set, and the decorative symbol is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial symbol. It may be displayed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a set value that is advantageous for the player, and the gaming interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, if there is a possibility that a new set value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has "4" and "5" as initial symbols from the left. , And "6" are used to illustrate the form in which the display of the decorative pattern is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is used. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. Further, depending on whether a setting value advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the output sound, the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

Then, returning to FIG. 10-29, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the pre-reading restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko game machine 1, specify which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and then specify which of the above. The start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. Then, after starting the start notification process timer, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table by executing the start notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. All you have to do is execute the notification.

In the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. Depending on the presence, the mode of notification of activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-32, when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is new. If the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

Further, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound B for 30 seconds. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the output sound A is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated and the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Output of the output sound C of the above, and display of a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value is completed) for 40 seconds is executed on the image display device 5. Although the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the setting value change end notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started. However, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

The feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the activation notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated is executed by using the gaming effect lamps 9, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer of a game hall or a management device such as a counter for each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification at the time of this, a signal that can identify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state, a part of the device that executes the start notification is common. Although a certain form (in each case, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether it is started in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal may be output from the external output terminal described above to the management device, etc.).

Further, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers), and if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, the sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared".

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value specification command is received) as a notification during the setting value change. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time), and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

As described above, the activation notification process exemplifies a mode in which the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines 1 are not limited thereto. The activation notification of is executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is executed regardless of which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and among these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, set value confirmation end notification command, and set value change end notification command, even if it is received, the pachinko game machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. Although a mode in which different combinations of decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 according to a command received when the player is started is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is used as an initialization effect. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part of them may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-29, the effect control CPU 120 then executes the power failure detection process (207SGS432). In the power supply cutoff detection process, as shown in FIG. 10-37, the effect control CPU 120 first receives an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less. Whether or not it is determined (207SGS441). If there is no power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; N), the process ends, and if there is a power cutoff signal input (207SGS441; Y), the set value information, player information, etc. stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The backup data to be included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when recovering the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Returning to FIG. 10-29, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 10-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

Next, a random number update process for production (207SGS435) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a random number for production such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol, a player information input process (207SGS436) that accepts input of player information, and a game. The player information output process (207SGS437) that outputs the person information and the effect information aggregation process (207SGS438) that aggregates the effect information are executed. After that, the process shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429).

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 uses a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance) by operating the player's stick controller 31A or push button 31B. The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the player's stick controller 31A and push button 31B, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. In addition, the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 on a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information aggregated in this game to an external server, thereby performing the pachinko game machine. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

In the effect information aggregation process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as the effect information each time the variation display, the jackpot game, and the super reach are executed. To do.

Next, the effect control process processing in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-38, in the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

Further, when the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is any one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is any of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452; Y), the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is set to -1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 (207SGS452) according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7), any of the processes is executed. By executing the processes of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the start-up, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variation display is executed four times.

In the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variation display is performed four times. Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated throughout, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 performs the start winning prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (FIG. By not executing (see 5), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays based on the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where the game can be played. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game has become possible, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game are set as settings related to the progress of the game. The amount of light of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set as the factory default state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effects of Super Reach A and Super Reach B as the first suggestion effects. It is possible to execute the reach production of Super Reach C and Super Reach D as the second suggestion effect, and when executing the reach production of Super Reach C and Super Reach D, the Super Reach C and Super Reach D are performed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effects of the super reach C and the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect of the above, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 207SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to suitably notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 207SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22).
When the set state is in the set state, the information display unit displays a display recognizable as the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the set state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine described in means A of the invention 207SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22).
When it is in the set state, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. In the case of, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body executes a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. The part that executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb019 in the moving body movement processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the set state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed. In addition, light emission control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine described in means B of the invention 207SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22).
When it is in the set state, the information display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. In the case of, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). CPU 120 executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb020 in the moving body operation processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the set state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 207SG,
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting means is used. The state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 10-23).
When the confirmation state is reached, the information display unit displays a display recognizable as the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process. If this is the case, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the confirmation state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed.

Further, as the gaming machine described in means C of the invention 207SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting means is used. The state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 10-23).
When the confirmation state is reached, the information display unit displays a display recognizable as the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process. In the case of, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body executes a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. The part that executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb019 in the moving body movement processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the confirmation state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed. In addition, light emission control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine described in the means D of the invention 207SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the setting means is used. The state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation process shown in FIG. 10-23).
When the confirmation state is reached, the information display unit displays a display recognizable as the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process. In the case of, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). CPU 120 executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb020 in the moving body operation processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is notified that the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is executed is in the confirmation state, which is preferable. Notification can be performed. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 207SG,
The display recognizable as the set state or the confirmed state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-27). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed are displayed. Different part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in a set state or a confirmed state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 207SG,
In the set state or the confirmed state, the variable display unit displays a display that can recognize the set state or the confirmed state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). The part that lights all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed in the variable display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display that can recognize that it is in the set state or the confirmation state, a display is performed in which all of the small display units are lit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). The part that lights all the constituent segments)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 6 of the invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a gaming medium into a gaming area (for example, left gaming area 207SG002L and right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game.
The information display unit includes a launch direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that notifies the launch direction of the game medium in the game area.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect, the launch direction notification unit makes a display recognizable that the setting state or the confirmation state is in effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A)). The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, suitable notification can be performed by the launch direction notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 7 of the invention 207SG,
A hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) that can store information related to the variable display as hold information is provided.
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, a display recognizable as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the setting is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that all segments constituting the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked in the value change state or the set value confirmation state) is described. For example, a suitable notification can be performed on the hold display unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 8 of the invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing into a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state is provided.
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state.
When the setting state or the confirmation state is reached, the number-of-times notification unit displays a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (A), the setting is performed. Of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 in the value change state or set value confirmation state, only one segment is lit)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a suitable notification can be performed by the number-of-times notification unit.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 9 of the invention 207SG,
A game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game, and
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage means (for example, the area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) that can store the state information (for example, the RAM clear flag) that can specify the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means, and
With
The game control means
The first condition (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, the state in which the clear switch is ON) is satisfied. At this time, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by erasing the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 10-21 (A)) is performed. Feasible and
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON) are satisfied, the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial stage to be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The initialization process common to the conversion process can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, the part where the RAM clear process and the set value change process can be executed).
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process. Not part)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the initialization process can be standardized when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.
The gaming machines described in the means 3 to 9 of the invention 207SG, which can be applied to the gaming machines described in the means 1 and the means 2 of the invention 207SG described above, are the gaming machines described in the means A to D of the invention 207SG described above. It can also be applied to.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 208SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to preferably leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the set state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 208SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of identifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed on the variable display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B)). When a setting value error occurs, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display unit that executes a variable display that is an important display in the gaming machine. Since it is notified by the display that it has been done, it is possible to preferably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied.

Further, as the gaming machine described in means A of the invention 208SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of identifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed on the variable display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B)). When a setting value abnormality error occurs, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body executes a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. The part that executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb019 in the moving body movement processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display unit that executes a variable display that is an important display in the gaming machine. Since it is notified by the display that it has been done, it is possible to preferably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied. In addition, light emission control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine described in means B of the invention 208SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) controlled by the game control means and capable of performing at least variable display. Part 207SG200)
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are each ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started), the set value by the setting means is set. The state shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 10-22).
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of identifying that the predetermined error has occurred is performed on the variable display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B)). When a setting value abnormality error occurs, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked).
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). CPU 120 executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb020 in the moving body operation processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display unit that executes a variable display that is an important display in the gaming machine. Since it is notified by the display that it has been done, it is possible to preferably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 208SG,
A gaming machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, a set value abnormality error). According to this feature, the set value is described. It is possible to preferably notify that an error regarding the storage area in which is stored occurs and that the set value needs to be reset.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new set value changed in the setting state is confirmed, an error regarding the storage area in which the set value is stored has occurred at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if the error is not present, a display that can identify the occurrence of an error is performed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power failure during the setting change is restored as shown in FIG. 10-27 (B), the first display is performed. A part that blinks all the segments constituting the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value because a power failure occurs before the set value is confirmed without setting a new error. It is possible to preferably notify that the above is true.
The gaming machine described in the means 2 to 3 of the invention 208SG, which can be applied to the gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 208SG described above, is also applied to the gaming machine described in the means A and the means B of the invention 208SG described above. can do.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the game value to be given, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209655 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and an information display means for confirming a set value are used. There is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if the above are provided individually. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 209SG that solves the problem.
It is a gaming machine that can play a game using a gaming medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value adding means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 10-17 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value) and
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (Part where only 207SG029D is used)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Therefore, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. It is not necessary to provide them individually, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Further, as the gaming machine described in the means A of the invention 209SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
It is a gaming machine that can play a game using a gaming medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value adding means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 10-17 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value) and
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (Part where only 207SG029D is used),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body executes a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. The part that executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb019 in the moving body movement processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Therefore, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. It is not necessary to provide them individually, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, light emission control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine described in the means B of the invention 209SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
It is a gaming machine that can play a game using a gaming medium and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out by doing),
A base having a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D) and having predetermined information regarding the game value given by the game value adding means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 10-17 (C)). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value) and
With
The information display means can display set value information capable of specifying a set value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, a pachinko game. When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state).
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the base value is different in the display monitor 207SG029. When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (Part where only 207SG029D is used),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). CPU 120 executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb020 in the moving body operation processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the set value information is also displayed in the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Therefore, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. It is not necessary to provide them individually, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can identify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which at least the set value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (B)). When a setting value abnormality error occurs, "E." is displayed in the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 10-25 (A) and 10-26 (B)). As shown in the above, in both the case of displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and the case of displaying the occurrence of an abnormal error, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display A game machine characterized by (a part using part 207SG029D) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in a storage area in which a set value is stored, and also to notify the set value information. Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be independently lit (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are each eight. Part made up of individual segments),
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on.
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means satisfies the initialization condition (for example, the clear switch is ON), the information display means constitutes each display unit. All the display units are turned on to be in a fully lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit. The part that repeats (blinks) all lighting and all extinguishing of all segments that make up the 207SG029D)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 209SG,
Equipped with a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on.
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of turning on the power detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example,). As shown in FIG. 10-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, after the execution of the 207SGSa015 and the 207SGSa016, the 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm the set value.
The gaming machine described in the means 2 to 4 of the invention 209SG, which can be applied to the gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 209SG described above, is also applied to the gaming machine described in the means A and the means B of the invention 209SG described above. can do.

The present embodiment also includes the invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on an operation of changing a set value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is changed, the operator may miss the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirmation operation again after the operation of changing the set value is completed. In this case, when the operation of changing the set value is completed during the first confirmation operation of the movable body, the change operation is completed. There is a problem that the confirmation operation of the new movable body is started from the timing of the movement, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting state shifts to a setting state in which the set value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, a clear switch and a lock switch are used when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process).
The control means
When the confirmation operation control for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) is shifted to the set state and the above. It can be executed when the setting state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, from the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command. Operation confirmation The actual operation starts from the part where the first movable body initialization process including the operation control and the second movable body initialization process are executed in order, and the timing when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the confirmation operation control are executed in order),
If the setting state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the setting state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine described in the means A of the invention 210SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-189349.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322, or the second movable body 401)
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process). The part to do) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting state shifts to a setting state in which the set value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, a clear switch and a lock switch are used when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process).
The control means
When the confirmation operation control for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) is shifted to the set state and the above. It can be executed when the setting state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, from the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command. Operation confirmation The actual operation starts from the part where the first movable body initialization process including the operation control and the second movable body initialization process are executed in order, and the timing when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the confirmation operation control are executed in order),
If the setting state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the setting state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the second movable body initialization process being executed is being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed),
further,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401).
With
In the control means, when the movable body executes a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. The part that executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb019 in the moving body movement processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation. In addition, light emission control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine described in means B of the invention 210SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-189349.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322, or the second movable body 401)
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process). The part to do) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When a specific condition is satisfied, the setting state shifts to a setting state in which the set value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, a clear switch and a lock switch are used when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process).
The control means
When the confirmation operation control for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) is shifted to the set state and the above. It can be executed when the setting state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, from the timing when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command. Operation confirmation The actual operation starts from the part where the first movable body initialization process including the operation control and the second movable body initialization process are executed in order, and the timing when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the confirmation operation control are executed in order),
If the setting state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the setting state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the second movable body initialization process being executed is being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed),
further,
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling the sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401).
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). CPU 120 executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb020 in the moving body operation processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of the invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) provided so as to be movable, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, it is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally. It can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command and a setting value confirmation. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the part that executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control in order, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation The part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the transition to the confirmation state is performed, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the confirmation state is not executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. 1 The part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means C of the invention 210SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-189349.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322, or the second movable body 401)
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process). The part to do) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, it is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally. It can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command and a setting value confirmation. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the part that executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control in order, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation The part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the transition to the confirmation state is performed, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the confirmation state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the second movable body initialization process being executed is being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed),
further,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401).
With
In the control means, when the movable body executes a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. The part that executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb019 in the moving body movement processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation. In addition, light emission control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine described in the means D of the invention 210SG, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-189349.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322, or the second movable body 401)
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process). The part to do) and
With a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10-22). ,
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value set by the setting means.
With
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-20, it is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization process and second movable body initialization process) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally. It can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command and a setting value confirmation. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the part that executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control in order, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation The part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirmation state is terminated while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the transition to the confirmation state is performed, the confirmation operation control due to the termination of the confirmation state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the second movable body initialization process being executed is being executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, it is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed),
further,
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling the sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body (for example, the second movable body 401).
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). CPU 120 executes the processing of Sb017 to Sb020 in the moving body operation processing.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of the invention 210SG,
The control means
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, the return operation control (for example, operation control at the time of non-detection) for causing the return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. It is feasible and can be done before taking control
When the set state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation ends (for example, a first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process). In the part where the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed after the non-detection self-operation control is completed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 4 of the invention 210SG,
When the set state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the control means sets the setting state or the setting state or the control means when the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control due to the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body is newly initialized after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed) On the other hand, when the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control is executed by the end of the setting state or the confirmation state (the part). For example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (B), the first movable body initialization process based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command is completed, and the first movable body initialization process is completed. 2 If a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the movable body initialization process, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly completed after the completion of the second movable body initialization process. The part that executes the movable body initialization process in order)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Further, as the gaming machine according to the means 5 of the invention 210SG,
With the plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process).
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed satisfies a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. The confirmation operation control due to the setting state or the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization process based on the reception of, the first one is newly executed after the execution of the second movable body initialization process. (Part where the movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the set state or the confirmation state has ended. The confirmation operation control is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (B), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the first movable body initialization process based on the above is completed and the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization process, the second movable body initialization process is performed. The part where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are newly executed in order after the end of
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state is completed, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.
The gaming machines described in the means 3 to 5 of the invention 210SG, which can be applied to the gaming machines described in the means 1 and the means 2 of the invention 210SG described above, are the gaming machines described in the means A to D of the invention 210SG described above. It can also be applied to.

Although the feature portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is used as the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the like. Although the embodiment composed of the design display 207SG020, the general drawing hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B even if they are not included.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the case where the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation state) is the first. Although an embodiment in which the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit in the same manner is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different modes depending on the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed and the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. It is possible to inform the existence in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on to turn on the first 1 The display mode (lighting mode) of the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value changing state and the set value confirmation state. If the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol It is not necessary to light some of the segments constituting the display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all segments and the round display 207SG131 constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. Illustrated a mode in which all segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, and the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are configured. The blinking of all segments may not be executed, or only a part of the blinking may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and unless it is a combination corresponding to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 10-6, the number of lights of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is a plurality. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited, and for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited thereto. The machine 1 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 in this way, it is sufficient to newly provide a display means for displaying the set value (or a temporary set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body A new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed. Although the embodiment for determining whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is determined. It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The present invention illustrates a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by using the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, or the like in a mode different from that during the game. Is not limited to this, but is limited to the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 207SG200. The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirmation state. ..

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, Although the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are set to different modes from those during the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the present invention has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during the game" may include different blinking cycles, different brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, a mode of executing the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. , Actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, An embodiment has been exemplified in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state by lighting or blinking the round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited thereto. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator A description indicating that the 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are lit or blinking may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, a clerk or the like of a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold. It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

(Explanation of feature 10F)
Next, the feature portion 10F will be described. The feature unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing a set value changing process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 11-1, the same processing as in FIG. 10-22 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the process of FIG. 10-20, the RAM clear process was executed in the process of 207SGa009 before the setting change process (207SGa013b) was executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process (207SGa013b), no information about the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process (207SGa009) may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in the 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. The feature unit 10F will be described on the premise that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa051). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 10-22 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 10-22 is executed.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the feature unit 10F. In FIG. 11-2, the same processing as in FIG. 10-23 is designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start process (10FS001). The details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 11-1. After the game stop start process, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are started to be lit (207SGSa101). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 10-23 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in the 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N). The details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 11-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 ends (207SGSa112). After that, the same process as that shown in FIG. 10-23 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start process will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers clock the time and period related to the game. The CPU 103 stops the timing of these plurality of timers when the game is stopped. These plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the large winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from the opening state to the closing state of the large winning opening door. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V-cover opening time timer is a predetermined switch (in a V-probability game machine that controls the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer provided in front of the sensor for detecting V probability change) for measuring the opening time of the V lid controlled by the open state and the closed state. In the V-probability gaming machine, the V-cover is opened in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. The area where the V-cover is open is called the V-winning area. The CPU 103 uses a V-cover opening time timer to measure the time from when the V-cover is opened to when it is closed. The V-passing waiting time timer is a timer for timing the V-winning time for determining that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 determines a game ball that has passed a predetermined switch with a delay even after the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from the open state to the closed state (a game ball is won in the large winning opening just before the closing of the large winning opening door). A game ball that has passed the switch) is also judged to be a V prize within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the validity period of the V prize, which is determined to be valid by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is a variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from the opening state to the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B by the electric chew opening time timer. ..

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The normal figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of a normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the jackpot game state is executed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 uses a fanfare time timer to measure the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect.

The ending time timer is a timer that measures the period during which the ending effect, which is the period for notifying the end of the big hit at the end of the big hit, is executed. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

As other timers other than the above-mentioned timers, the CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the special symbol to the start of the variable display of the next special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation stop period timer. The normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the derivation display of the variable display of the normal symbol to the start of the variable display of the next normal symbol by the timer for the normal symbol fluctuation stop period.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the feature unit 10F. The CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is operating in the game stop start process (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010; Y), the operating attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not running (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is running (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the operating inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V-cover opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the V-cover opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V-passing waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the electric chew open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the electric chew open time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS015; Y), the operating special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS015; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the operating normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017; Y), the operating fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated.

If the fanfare time timer is not running (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is running (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is operating (10FS018; Y), the operating ending time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not operating (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is operating as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is operating (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timer is not running (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the ball striking operation handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, a process of disabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing to invalidate the payout of prize balls. Due to the other processing (10FS021), various processings are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the feature unit 10F will be described. FIG. 11-4 is a flowchart showing the game stop end process in the feature unit 10F. The CPU 103 first determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the attacker open time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-cover opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-cover opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V-cover opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V-pass waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V-passing waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V-passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the V-passing waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the operating electric chew open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS030, if the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether or not the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timer is stopped (10FS039; Y), the other timer that is stopped is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the other timer is not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, a process for enabling the firing of the ball striking operation handle 30, a process for enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning port 10, the out port, and the passing gate 41, and a process for enabling the detection of various errors. It includes processing to enable the payout of prize balls. By the other processing (10FS041), various processings are enabled and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the feature part)
As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 is the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Stops the timekeeping of, and restarts the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timekeeping of the inter-round interval period timer period is restarted based on the end. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the interval period between rounds in the setting confirmation state. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the time counting of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged because the validity period of the V prize is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and the valid period of the electric chew open time timer. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in a state where the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 clocks the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Is stopped, and the timing of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timekeeping of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the ending effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The time counting of the period of the variable stop period timer is stopped, and the time counting of the period of the special figure variable stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(About the modified example of the feature part)
Although the feature portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included. A modified example of the feature portion 10F will be described below.
To do.

We have described a gaming machine (so-called first-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display results of special symbols and decorative symbols, but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the gaming area. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a game ball winning (V-winning) in the special winning opening (V winning opening), and first and second types It may be applied to a gaming machine (a type / two type mixer) in which the above is combined. When the start winning prize to the second starting winning opening is detected, the big hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result is obtained. Game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result is obtained. It is controlled to the state, and the special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is accepted by the special variable winning ball device for small hits in the small hit game state, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, it is variable for big hits. The second-class jackpot game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds is executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

In such a type 1 type 2 mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided to measure the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V region) is effective. The CPU 103 also determines that the game ball that has passed the predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is also determined to be a winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small hit time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. , The timekeeping of the valid period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the small hit game state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls have been executed for the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the same control may be executed even in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of various timers based on being controlled to the setting change state when the player is in a favorable state, and the various timers are based on the end of the setting change state. You may want to restart the timekeeping.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol results in a jackpot display result or an off display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol results in a big hit display result, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. If the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in an incorrect display result, the time measurement of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state. .. In this way, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player for the jackpot display result which is advantageous for the player, but the timer is not disadvantageous to the player for the off display result. It can be prevented from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a jackpot display result or a missed display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the out-of-order display result, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer during the execution of the out-of-order variable display. Occasionally, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or unfavorable to the player. For example, when the setting value is favorable to the player, the various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the various timers are stopped. You may not stop.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 10F)
As described above, the feature section 10F includes the inventions shown below with respect to the feature section 10F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the feature unit 10A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. A part that executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb019 in the movable body motion process.).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous. In addition, it is possible to preferably execute light emission control according to the movement of the movable body.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the feature unit 10B is configured as follows.
(B) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
It is provided with a variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). The part where the CPU 120 executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb020 in the movable body operation process.).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

The set value may be suggested depending on the operation mode of the movable body. For example, by selecting the motion mode of the movable body from a plurality of types by lottery or the like and making the selection ratio of each motion mode of the movable body different depending on the set value, the set value can be set as a game. The more advantageous it is to the person, the easier it is to produce a movable body according to a specific type of movement mode. By doing so, the movement mode of the movable body is rich in variation, and the player can be given an opportunity to estimate the set value according to the appearance ratio of each movement mode of the movable body, so that the game interest can be improved. Can be done.
Further, the set value may be suggested by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means or the sound output mode of the sound output means according to the operation of the movable body. For example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and the sound output mode of the sound output means are selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and the selection ratio of each light emitting mode and each sound output mode is different depending on the set value. Therefore, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the easier it may be to produce a movable body according to a specific type of light emitting mode or sound output mode. By doing so, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means and the sound output mode of the sound output means in the movable body production are rich in variation, and moreover, there is an opportunity to estimate the set value by the appearance ratio of each light emitting mode and each sound output mode. Since it can be given to a person, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.
Further, when the movable body is operated, the set value suggestion effect may be performed by the image display device. For example, when operating a movable body, a character is displayed on an image display device, and each time the movable body effect is executed, the character is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and each character is selected according to a set value. By making the selection ratio of the characters different, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is to perform the effect by a specific type of character. By doing so, if the movable body effect is executed, the set value suggestion effect is performed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
Further equipped with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for measuring the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
The gaming machines of the feature sections 10F (2) to (9) that can be applied to the gaming machine of the feature section 10F (1) are the gaming machines of the feature section 10A (A) and the feature section 10B (B). It can also be applied to gaming machines.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 11F)
The following invention may be included as the feature portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the feature unit 11A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. A part that executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb019 in the movable body motion process.).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming. In addition, it is possible to preferably execute light emission control according to the movement of the movable body.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the feature unit 11B is configured as follows.
(B) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). The part where the CPU 120 executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb020 in the movable body operation process.).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
Further equipped with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for measuring the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
The gaming machines of the feature sections 11F (2) to (9) that can be applied to the gaming machines of the feature section 11F (1) described above are the gaming machines of the feature section 11A (A) and the feature section 11B (B). It can also be applied to gaming machines.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 12F)
The following inventions may be included as the feature portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
It is provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol).
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the feature unit 12A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
It is provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol).
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. (Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. A part that executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb019 in the movable body motion process.).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to preferably execute light emission control according to the movement of the movable body.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the feature unit 12B is configured as follows.
(B) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
It is provided with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol).
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. (Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). The part where the CPU 120 executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb020 in the movable body operation process.).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
It is further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that measures with a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) for measuring the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the timing of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Figure Stops the timing of the fluctuation stop period timer, and restarts the timing of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to proceed with the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is further equipped with a normal variable display time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for measuring the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
The gaming machines of the feature sections 12F (2) to (10) that can be applied to the gaming machines of the feature section 12F (1) described above are the gaming machines of the feature section 12A (A) and the feature section 12B (B). It can also be applied to gaming machines.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Feature 13F)
The following invention may be included as the feature portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value, the process can be shifted to the next process only when all the main processes being executed are completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

However, in the case of a gaming machine such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processing being executed is completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. Couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the feature unit 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display result is derived. ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 that measures with a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. The timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the feature unit 13A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display result is derived. ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 that measures with a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. (Resumes the timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
A light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, LED406 for the second production) and
A control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling the light emitting means to emit light according to the operation of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120).
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) is satisfied due to the elapse of the predetermined time, the control for causing the light emitting means to emit light (light emission control) is terminated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used. A part that executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb019 in the movable body motion process.).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to preferably execute light emission control according to the movement of the movable body.

Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the feature unit 13B is configured as follows.
(B) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is variably displayed and the specific display result is derived. ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs a setting value changing process) that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different advantages for the player according to the setting changing operation. The part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process) that can control the setting confirmation state that can confirm which set value is set, and
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41), the ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the ordinary identification information (for example, the ordinary symbol) and derives the display result,
It is equipped with a normal variable display measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 that measures with a normal figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information.
The normal variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the time is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal identification information is executed, and is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. (Resumes the timekeeping of the valid period of the normal figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Movable movable body (for example, second movable body 401) and
Sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) and
A control means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) capable of controlling sound output from the sound output means (sound output control) according to a predetermined operation of the movable body, and
With
In the control means, when the movable body performs a predetermined operation (an operation of rotating until the operation time elapses and stopping at an initial position after the operation time elapses), the movable body performs the predetermined operation. When the first end condition (the second rotation motor 405 is stopped and the initial position is detected) due to the end is satisfied, or when the movable body ends the operation, the first end condition is satisfied. When the second end condition (the upper limit time elapses) due to the elapse of the predetermined time is satisfied, the control for outputting the sound from the sound output means (sound output control) is ended (for example, the effect control). The part where the CPU 120 executes the processes of Sb017 to Sb020 in the movable body operation process.).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented. Further, the sound output control according to the movement of the movable body can be preferably executed.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is unfavorable for the player.
A predetermined game executing means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state a plurality of times during the advantageous state.
Further provided with variable winning time timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an attacker open time timer) for measuring the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state.
The variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 clocks the period of the attacker open time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. Is stopped, and the timekeeping of the attacker open time timer period is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted in the setting confirmation state, so that the game progresses, so that the player can proceed. Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
It is further provided with a stop timing means (for example, CPU 103 that measures with a special figure fluctuation stop period timer) for measuring the period from the stop of the variable display of the identification information to the start of the next variable display.
The stop timing means stops the timing of the period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is changed. The timing of the period is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state from the time when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. Figure Stops the timing of the fluctuation stop period timer, and restarts the timing of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted to proceed with the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above
A predetermined game timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an inter-round interval period timer) for timing a period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (for example, an inter-round interval period) is further provided.
The predetermined game timing means stops the time timing of the period based on the fact that the time timing is controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Resume timing of the inter-round interval period timer based on what you did).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent a person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In any of the game machines (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which the game medium can enter, and
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state increases based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area.
A specific timekeeping means (for example, a valid period for V prize) that measures a valid period (for example, a valid period for V prize) for determining that a game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the valid period for V prize). For example, a CPU 103) that clocks with a V-passing waiting time timer is further provided.
The specific timekeeping means stops the timing of the valid period based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the valid period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. Resuming the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V prize, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state. To restart the timing of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the valid period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
With a normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the passing gate 41) and derives and displays the display result. ,
When the display result of the ordinary variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, per drawing), the game medium is in a state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state). , Variable winning ball device 6B),
It is further provided with a normal variable winning time measuring means (for example, a CPU 103 measuring by an electric chew open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning time timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the normal variable winning means is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 determines the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Stops the timekeeping and restarts the timekeeping of the valid period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normally variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent it from becoming.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, a special symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state).
Further equipped with a variable display time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a special figure fluctuation time timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the identification information.
The variable display time measuring means stops the time counting of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In any of the game machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with a start notification effect timing means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a fanfare time timer) for measuring the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the start notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the fanfare time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the validity period of the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the start notification effect is executed in the setting confirmation state to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above,
An end notification effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) that executes an end notification effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period.
Further provided with an end notification effect time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by an ending time timer) for measuring the execution period of the end notification effect.
The end notification effect timing means stops the time counting of the period based on the fact that the end notification effect is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the time counting of the valid period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the game machines (1) to (9) above,
A special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit display result).
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state, and
It is further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter.
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the special area, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is controlled.
Further provided with a special time measuring means (for example, CPU 103 measuring by a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid.
The special timekeeping means stops the time counting of the valid period based on the control of the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time counting of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example). , The CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes the timing of the validity period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control in the special state is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
The gaming machines of the feature sections 13F (2) to (10) that can be applied to the gaming machine of the feature section 13F (1) described above are the gaming machines of the feature section 13A (A) and the feature section 13B (B). It can also be applied to gaming machines.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1,1A Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU
123 Display control unit 301 1st movable body 319L, 319R Locking recess 340L, 340L Locking member 344L, 344R Auxiliary side wall 351 1st movable part 352 2nd movable part 353 3rd movable part 401 2nd movable body 409 Motor control unit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means capable of setting a setting value regarding the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and
A setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation control means.
An interrupt process execution means that executes an interrupt process that can execute a game-related process,
A special variable display means that can display the variable display result by variable display of the special identification information,
Special variable display timekeeping means for timing the special variable display period for variable display of special identification information,
An ordinary variable display means that variably displays the ordinary identification information based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area and derives and displays the display result.
Ordinary variable timekeeping means for timing the ordinary variable display period, which performs variable display of ordinary identification information,
Equipped with an external output means that can output a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine,
The setting confirmation control means can control the setting confirmation state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing is executed.
The interrupt process is executed when the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interrupt process is executed, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the special variable display period is clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the power to the gaming machine is controlled. The time counting of the special variable display period is interrupted from the restart of the supply to the end of the setting confirmation state, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the special variable display period is restarted.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the normal variable display period is clocked, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted and controlled to the setting confirmation state, the power to the gaming machine is controlled. The time counting of the normal variable display period is interrupted from the restart of the supply to the end of the setting confirmation state, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the time measurement of the normal variable display period is restarted.
The external output means can output the specific signal when controlled to the setting confirmation state.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A storage means that can store game information,
An initialization means capable of initializing game information stored in the storage means based on an operation of the initialization operation means, and an initialization means.
It is provided with a setting permission state control means that can control the setting permission state for permitting the setting of the setting value.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started in the state where the setting operating means is in a predetermined state and the initialization operating means is operated, the game information stored in the storage means is initialized.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started in the situation where the setting operation means is in a specific state and the initialization operation means is operated, the setting is controlled to the setting permission state.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started in a situation where the setting operation means is in the specific state and the initialization operation means is not operated, the setting confirmation state is controlled.
The storage means
It has at least a predetermined area in which the game information is stored and a specific area in which set value data indicating a set value corresponding to an address higher than the predetermined area is stored.
It has an area between the predetermined area and the specific area where information not used for the game is stored.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images